Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 251
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document outlines instructions for use of the BuckyDiagnost system including an overview of its components, safety guidelines, and supported imaging techniques.

The main components discussed are the Bucky, control unit, tube assembly, and ceiling suspension unit.

Safety measures outlined include electrical, mechanical, radiation protection, and prohibited uses.

English

Instructions for Use

BuckyDiagnost
Version 1
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
4512 987 10081 AA
BuckyDiagnost Version 1 Instructions for Use
BuckyDiagnost
Instructions for Use

Version 1
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006
© Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2006
Philips Medical Systems is part of Royal All rights are reserved. Reproduction or transmission
in whole or in part, in any form or by any means,
Philips Electronics electronic, mechanical or otherwise, is prohibited
without the prior written consent of the copyright
owner.

www.medical.philips.com
X 0123
This Medical Device meets the provisions of the
transposition of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/
medical@philips.com EEC within the country of the EU Authorized
Representative for the device concerned.
Manufacturing address Copyrights and all other proprietary rights in any
Philips Medical Systems DMC GmbH software and related documentation (“Software”)
made available to you rest exclusively with Philips or
Röntgenstraße 24 its licensors. No title or ownership in the Software is
conferred to you. Use of the Software is subject to the
22335 Hamburg end user license conditions as are available on request.

Germany To the maximum extent permitted by law, you shall


not decompile and/or reverse engineer the software or
any part thereof.

Printed in Germany.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Table of contents

1 Useful information .......................................... 1-3

1.1 Version .............................................................................. 1-3


1.2 For safe operation .............................................................. 1-3
1.2.1 Version ............................................................... 1-3
1.3 Conformity ....................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Training ............................................................................ 1-4

2 Safety ................................................................ 2-3

2.1 About these Instructions for Use ........................................ 2-3


2.2 Electrical safety .................................................................. 2-3
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

2.3 Mechanical safety .............................................................. 2-3


2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ............................... 2-3
2.5 Radiation protection .......................................................... 2-4
2.6 The laser light source ......................................................... 2-5
2.7 Disposal ............................................................................. 2-5
2.8 Normal use ........................................................................ 2-5
2.9 Prohibited use ................................................................... 2-6
2.10 In the event of power outage ............................................. 2-7

3 BuckyDiagnost – an overview ........................ 3-3

3.1 What is BuckyDiagnost? .................................................... 3-3


3.2 Functions .......................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Automatic collimation ........................................ 3-3
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3.2.2 PBL (Positive Beam Limitation) ......................... 3-3


3.2.3 Defined exposure positions ................................. 3-4
3.2.4 The automatic Bucky (optional) ......................... 3-4
3.2.5 The interchangeable grid .................................... 3-4
3.2.6 Tomography (optional) ...................................... 3-5
3.2.7 Tracking for the SID (optional) .......................... 3-5
3.2.8 Control grip ........................................................ 3-8
3.2.9 The key-operated switch ..................................... 3-8
3.2.10 Tracking for the image receptor .......................... 3-9

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 0-5


Table of contents

3.2.11 Tomography in combination with tracking


............................................................................ 3-9
3.2.12 Mode display ...................................................... 3-9
3.2.13 Center position ................................................. 3-10
3.2.14 Automatic size sensing ...................................... 3-10
3.2.15 The Optimus generators ................................... 3-11
3.3 Legend ............................................................................. 3-13
3.3.1 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
.......................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS ....... 3-15
3.3.3 The control grip of the automatic collimator
.......................................................................... 3-17
3.3.4 The control grip of the manual collimator ........ 3-19
3.3.5 The patient tables BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF
.......................................................................... 3-20
3.3.6 The vertical Buckys BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with
ACL4 ................................................................ 3-23
3.3.7 Automatic cassette tray ACL4 ........................... 3-26
3.3.8 The radiography unit BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
.......................................................................... 3-28
3.3.9 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X ....... 3-29
3.3.10 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS ............. 3-29
3.3.11 BuckyDiagnost VR ........................................... 3-40
3.3.12 The Optimus generators ................................... 3-41
3.3.13 The patient data printer Optimus PDO ........... 3-47

4 Operation ........................................................ 4-3

4.1 The quick way to great exposures ...................................... 4-3


4.2 Moving the tube assembly ................................................. 4-4
4.2.1 Movements ......................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Tips to easily position the tube assembly with the
control grip ......................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Center the tube assembly opposite the Bucky or the
free cassette ......................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Setting SID with second laser for free exposure
technique and oblique exposures (optional)
............................................................................ 4-8
4.3 Manual collimator ........................................................... 4-10
4.3.1 Selecting added filters ....................................... 4-10
4.3.2 Measuring the SID ........................................... 4-10
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4.3.3 Collimating ...................................................... 4-11


4.4 Automatic collimator ....................................................... 4-12
4.4.1 Cassette size sensing .......................................... 4-12
4.4.2 Selecting added filters ....................................... 4-13
4.4.3 SID display ....................................................... 4-13
4.4.4 Collimating ...................................................... 4-15
4.5 Operating the extended version ....................................... 4-16
4.5.1 Selecting auxiliary ............................................. 4-16
4.5.2 Selecting APR program ..................................... 4-17

0-6 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

4.6 Moving the table top ....................................................... 4-18


4.7 Moving BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 .................... 4-19
4.8 Moving BuckyDiagnost VS ............................................. 4-20
4.8.1 Movements ....................................................... 4-20
4.8.2 Raising/lowering Bucky unit ............................. 4-21
4.8.3 Tilting Bucky unit ............................................ 4-22
4.8.4 Moving Bucky unit into the factory-set default
position ............................................................ 4-23
4.8.5 Positioning patient ............................................ 4-25
4.9 Changing manual cassette tray ......................................... 4-26
4.9.1 Preconditions .................................................... 4-26
4.9.2 At the table ....................................................... 4-26
4.9.3 On the BuckyDiagnost VS with Bucky unit
.......................................................................... 4-28
4.10 Automatic cassette tray ACL4 .......................................... 4-31
4.10.1 Risk of tripping fingers ..................................... 4-31
4.10.2 The reset function ............................................. 4-31
4.10.3 Changing the cassette ....................................... 4-32
4.11 Changing grids on the ACL4 ........................................... 4-33
4.11.1 At the table ....................................................... 4-33
4.11.2 On the vertical Bucky ....................................... 4-35
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

4.11.3 On the BuckyDiagnost VS ............................... 4-37


4.11.4 Storing / removing grids ................................... 4-38
4.12 Operation of tracking ...................................................... 4-38
4.12.1 Tracking for the SID ........................................ 4-38
4.12.2 Tracking for the image receptor ........................ 4-39
4.12.3 Changing auxiliaries .......................................... 4-40
4.13 Tomography (optional) ................................................... 4-40
4.14 Releasing an exposure ...................................................... 4-42
4.15 In the event of an error .................................................... 4-42
4.16 Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II .......................... 4-43
4.16.1 Cassette holder ................................................. 4-43
4.16.2 Moving unit ..................................................... 4-45
4.16.3 When you are working on the BuckyDiagnost TH or
the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT/VS ......................... 4-47
4.16.4 Preferred working positions .............................. 4-47
4.17 Operation of TRAUMOB X ........................................... 4-49
4.17.1 Abort patient positioning .................................. 4-49
4.17.2 Inserting table top ............................................. 4-49
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4.17.3 Moving unit ..................................................... 4-49


4.17.4 How the brake works ........................................ 4-50
4.17.5 Raising/lowering the table top .......................... 4-50
4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 .......... 4-50
4.18.1 Operation of all configurations ......................... 4-50
4.18.2 Operation of the basic configuration ................. 4-51
4.18.3 Operation with AEC, without APR .................. 4-53
4.18.4 Operation with APR, without AEC .................. 4-55
4.18.5 APR records ...................................................... 4-55
4.18.6 Operation with AEC and APR ......................... 4-59

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 0-7


Table of contents

4.18.7 Tomography ..................................................... 4-63


4.18.8 Dose display (optional, depends on system)
.......................................................................... 4-67
4.19 Operation of the patient data printer Optimus PDO
......................................................................................... 4-68
4.19.1 Activating the output device ............................. 4-68
4.19.2 Setting exposure data ........................................ 4-68
4.19.3 Positioning patient ............................................ 4-68
4.19.4 Selecting examination room .............................. 4-68
4.19.5 Recording new patient data .............................. 4-68
4.19.6 Editing patient data .......................................... 4-70
4.19.7 Releasing exposure ............................................ 4-70
4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30 ....... 4-71
4.20.1 Operation – in a few words ............................... 4-71
4.20.2 Operation in detail ........................................... 4-72

5 Maintenance .................................................... 5-3

5.1 Obligations of the user ...................................................... 5-3


5.2 Tests by the user ................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Check AEC function acc. to IEC 60601-2-7 ..................... 5-4
5.4 Safety checks according to the Medical Device Directive
........................................................................................... 5-4

6 Servicing ........................................................... 6-3

6.1 Maintenance ...................................................................... 6-3


6.2 Repairs .............................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Recording results ............................................................... 6-3
6.4 Cleaning ............................................................................ 6-4
6.5 Disinfection ....................................................................... 6-4

7 Technical data ................................................. 7-3


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7.1 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 ....................................................... 7-3


7.1.1 Equipment data .................................................. 7-3
7.1.2 Labels ................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Compatibility ..................................................... 7-6
7.2 BuckyDiagnost FS ............................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 Equipment data .................................................. 7-6
7.2.2 Labels ................................................................. 7-7
7.2.3 Compatibility ..................................................... 7-9

0-8 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

7.3 BuckyDiagnost VS .......................................................... 7-10


7.3.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-10
7.3.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-11
7.3.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-14
7.3.4 Options ............................................................ 7-14
7.4 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF ................................................. 7-14
7.4.1 Equipement data .............................................. 7-14
7.4.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-15
7.4.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-17
7.5 BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 ................................. 7-17
7.5.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-17
7.5.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-18
7.5.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-22
7.6 BuckyDiagnost Trauma II ............................................... 7-22
7.6.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-22
7.6.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-23
7.6.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-24
7.7 TRAUMOB X ................................................................ 7-25
7.7.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-25
7.7.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-26
7.7.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-28
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

7.8 Optimus 50/65/80 .......................................................... 7-28


7.8.1 Electrical data ................................................... 7-28
7.8.2 Setting ranges ................................................... 7-29
7.8.3 Ambient conditions for operation ..................... 7-29
7.8.4 Accuracy of the operating data, tolerances ......... 7-30
7.8.5 Methods of measurement ................................. 7-31
7.8.6 Labels ............................................................... 7-31
7.8.7 Compatible tube assemblies .............................. 7-32
7.9 Optimus 30 single-phase generator .................................. 7-32
7.9.1 Electrical data ................................................... 7-32
7.9.2 Ambient conditions for operation ..................... 7-33
7.9.3 Setting ranges and tolerances ............................ 7-33
7.9.4 Accuracy of operating data ................................ 7-33
7.9.5 Methods of measurement ................................. 7-34
7.9.6 Compatibility ................................................... 7-34
7.9.7 Labels ............................................................... 7-35
7.10 Optimus PDO ................................................................ 7-35
7.11 Tomography programs .................................................... 7-36
7.12 Interchangeable grids and usable SIDs ............................. 7-37
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7.12.1 Grid data .......................................................... 7-37


7.12.2 Cassette sizes [cm/inch] .................................... 7-37

8 Accessories ...................................................... 8-3

8.1 Abort using accessories ...................................................... 8-3

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 0-9


Table of contents

8.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT ............... 8-3


8.2.1 Normal use ......................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Prohibited use ..................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Legend ................................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Installation .......................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 Dismantling ........................................................ 8-5
8.2.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette ..................... 8-6
8.2.7 Removing a cassette ............................................ 8-7
8.2.8 Technical data .................................................... 8-7
8.2.9 Compatibility ..................................................... 8-7
8.2.10 Labels ................................................................. 8-8
8.3 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS ...................... 8-8
8.3.1 Labels ................................................................. 8-8
8.3.2 Normal use ......................................................... 8-8
8.3.3 Prohibited use ..................................................... 8-9
8.3.4 Legend ................................................................ 8-9
8.3.5 Installation .......................................................... 8-9
8.3.6 Dismantling ...................................................... 8-10
8.3.7 Inserting and positioning a cassette ................... 8-11
8.3.8 Removing a cassette .......................................... 8-12
8.3.9 Technical data .................................................. 8-12
8.3.10 Compatibility ................................................... 8-12
8.4 Long cassette holder ........................................................ 8-13
8.4.1 Normal use ....................................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Prohibited use ................................................... 8-13
8.4.3 Legend .............................................................. 8-13
8.4.4 Installation ........................................................ 8-13
8.4.5 Dismantling ...................................................... 8-15
8.4.6 Inserting a cassette ............................................ 8-15
8.4.7 Removing a cassette .......................................... 8-16
8.4.8 Technical data .................................................. 8-16
8.4.9 Compatibility ................................................... 8-16
8.4.10 Labels ............................................................... 8-17
8.5 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 ....... 8-17
8.5.1 Normal use ....................................................... 8-17
8.5.2 Prohibited use ................................................... 8-17
8.5.3 Legend .............................................................. 8-18
8.5.4 Operation ......................................................... 8-18
8.5.5 Technical data .................................................. 8-19
8.5.6 Compatibility ................................................... 8-19
8.5.7 Labels ............................................................... 8-19
8.6 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS ................................ 8-19
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8.6.1 Customer Service .............................................. 8-19


8.6.2 Normal use ....................................................... 8-20
8.6.3 Prohibited use ................................................... 8-20
8.6.4 Legend .............................................................. 8-20
8.6.5 Operation ......................................................... 8-20
8.6.6 Technical data .................................................. 8-21
8.6.7 Compatibility ................................................... 8-21
8.6.8 Labels ............................................................... 8-22
8.7 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF ................................................. 8-22
8.7.1 Attaching the handswitch ................................. 8-22

0-10 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

8.7.2 Removing the handswitch ................................. 8-22

9 Appendix .......................................................... 9-3

9.1 Messages ............................................................................ 9-3


9.1.1 System messages ................................................. 9-3
9.1.2 Generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 error messages
............................................................................ 9-5
9.1.3 Single-phase generator Optimus 30 error messages
............................................................................ 9-5
9.1.4 Patient data printer Optimus PDO error messages
............................................................................ 9-7
9.2 EMC data .......................................................................... 9-8
9.2.1 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration ........... 9-8
9.3 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – the hierarchy of levels on the display
......................................................................................... 9-10
9.4 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – button symbols and their meaning
......................................................................................... 9-11
9.5 Screen film combinations ................................................ 9-12
9.6 Exposure table ................................................................. 9-13
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user ............. 9-16
9.7.1 You want to adapt the program to your system
.......................................................................... 9-16
9.7.2 If you wish to configure the program to your
requirements ..................................................... 9-18
9.7.3 You want to test your system ............................ 9-24
9.7.4 How to install the equipment ........................... 9-25
9.8 Glossary ........................................................................... 9-27
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 0-11


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

0-12 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

1 Useful information .......................................... 1-3

1.1 Version .............................................................................. 1-3


1.2 For safe operation .............................................................. 1-3
1.2.1 Version ............................................................... 1-3
1.3 Conformity ....................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Training ............................................................................ 1-4
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 1-1


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

1-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 45131019

1 Useful information
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 15:52:26

ID: 17386763
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
1.1 Version
The status of the Instructions for Use corresponds to the latest version
of the X-ray unit on going to print.
You can obtain this X-ray equipment in various configurations. These
Instructions for Use describe the largest configuration possible. For this
reason they may describe components or functions which are not part
of your X-ray equipment.
ID: 17387787
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
1.2 For safe operation
• If the user wishes to connect the X-ray equipment to other equip-
ment, components or assemblies and if it is not apparent from the
technical data whether it can be safely combined with such equip-
ment, components or assemblies, the user must ensure that the safety
of the patient, operating staff and the environment is not affected by
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

the planned combination by consulting the manufacturers involved


or by making enquiries from an expert.
• Philips is responsible for the safety features of its products only if
maintenance, repairs and modifications have been performed by
Philips or by persons explicitly authorised to do so by Philips.
• As with any technical appliance, this equipment requires not only
correct operation but also regular, competent maintenance and care,
which are described in the section ”Maintenance“.
• If you operate the X-ray equipment incorrectly or if the user fails to
have maintenance carried out properly, Philips cannot be held liable
for any malfunctions, damage or injuries.
• Safety circuits must be neither removed nor modified.
• You may remove or open parts of the housing only if you are in-
structed to do so in this manual.
• After use please remove the key.
ID: 17386763
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:37:32 1.2.1 Version
The status of the Instructions for Use corresponds to the latest version
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

of the X-ray unit on going to print.


You can obtain this X-ray equipment in various configurations. These
Instructions for Use describe the largest configuration possible. For this
reason they may describe components or functions which are not part
of your X-ray equipment.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Useful information 1-3


1.3 Conformity

ID: 17388811
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
1.3 Conformity
This Medical Device meets the provisions of the Medical Device Di-
rective MDD 93/42 EEC (93).
If you have further questions regarding the applicable national or in-
ternational standards, please address them to:
Philips Medical Systems DMC GmbH
Quality Assurance Department
Roentgenstrasse 24
22335 Hamburg

Fax: (+49) 40/5078-2147


ID: 17389835
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:37:32
1.4 Training
The X-ray equipment may only be operated by persons who have the
necessary expertise in radiation protection or knowledge of radiation
protection and who have been instructed in how to operate the X-ray
equipment.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

1-4 Useful information BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

2 Safety ................................................................ 2-3

2.1 About these Instructions for Use ........................................ 2-3


2.2 Electrical safety .................................................................. 2-3
2.3 Mechanical safety .............................................................. 2-3
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ............................... 2-3
2.5 Radiation protection .......................................................... 2-4
2.6 The laser light source ......................................................... 2-5
2.7 Disposal ............................................................................. 2-5
2.8 Normal use ........................................................................ 2-5
2.9 Prohibited use ................................................................... 2-6
2.10 In the event of power outage ............................................. 2-7
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 2-1


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

2-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 45214475

2 Safety
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 16:53:56

ID: 17393035
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
2.1 About these Instructions for Use
This manual is designed to make it possible for you to work with the
X-ray equipment described safely. You may operate the X-ray equip-
ment only in compliance with the safety instructions in this manual and
not use it for purposes other than for which it is intended.
It is always the user who is responsible for compliance with the regula-
tions applying to installation and operation of X-ray equipment.
ID: 17394059
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
2.2 Electrical safety
This X-ray equipment meets the safety class I and type B according to
IEC 60601-1.
Only trained maintenance staff may remove the covers from the high-
voltage cable of the X-ray tube assembly and the high-voltage generator.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

This X-ray equipment may only be operated in medical rooms which


meet IEC requirements.

▪ You must never operate this X-ray equipment in areas where there is a risk
of explosion.
▪ Detergents and disinfectants, including those used on patients, may create
explosive mixtures of gases. Please observe the relevant regulations.
DANGER
ID: 19342347
Created by: dep04257
Created: 12.09.2005 10:58:03
Changed by: dep04257
Changed: 12.09.2005 10:58:25
2.3 Mechanical safety

▪ Please ensure that neither the patient nor yourself allows hands to enter the
range of movement of the X-ray equipment and that no parts of clothing can
be caught by it.

DANGER
▪ Remove all objects from the range of movement of the X-ray equipment.

ID: 17396107
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
Changed by: dep03476
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed: 05.09.2005 17:39:38

In accordance with its intended use, this electronic apparatus complies


with the law governing EMC, which defines the permitted emission
levels from electronic equipment and its required immunity against
electromagnetic fields.
Nevertheless, it is not possible to exclude with absolute certainty the
possibility that radio signals from high-frequency transmitters, e.g. mo-
bile phones or similar mobile radio equipment, which themselves
conform to the EMC regulations, may influence the proper functioning

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Safety 2-3


2.5 Radiation protection

of electromedical apparatus if such equipment is operated in close prox-


imity and with relatively high transmitting power. Therefore, operation
of such radio equipment in the immediate vicinity of electronically
controlled medical apparatus should be avoided to eliminate any risk of
interference.
Explanation:
Electronic apparatus that satisfies the EMC requirements is designed so
that under normal conditions there is no risk of malfunction caused by
electromagnetic interference. However, in the case of radio signals from
high-frequency transmitters with a relatively high transmitting power,
the risk of electromagnetic incompatibility when operated in close prox-
imity to electronic apparatus cannot be totally ruled out.
In unusual circumstances unintended functions of the apparatus could
be initiated, possibly giving rise to undesirable risks for the patient or
user.
For this reason, all kinds of transmission with mobile radio equipment
should be avoided. This also applies when the apparatus is in “standby”
mode.
Mobile telephones must be switched off in designated problem zones.
ID: 19345419
Created by: dep04257
Created: 12.09.2005 11:02:48
Changed by: dep04257
Changed: 12.09.2005 11:02:57
2.5 Radiation protection

Ensure that before performing any radiography all the necessary radiation pre-
cautions have been taken.
Personnel in the examination room must comply with the valid radiation protec-
tion regulations when using X-rays. Please comply with the following rules:
WARNING
▪ To protect the patient against radiation always use radiation protection ac-
cessories in addition to devices which are fitted to the X-ray equipment (e.g.
collimator, spacer, filter).
▪ Wear protective clothing. Radiation protection aprons with a lead equivalent
of 0.35 mm attenuate X-radiation at 50 kV by 99.84%, and at 100 kV by 91.2%.
▪ Always use the smallest possible X-ray field collimation. Scattered radiation
is largely dependent on the volume of the object being exposed.
▪ Wear a personal dosemeter if you have to be in the controlled area occasion-
ally. Philips recommends determining the personal dose occurring at the
workplace under practical conditions and using it as the basis for radiation
precautions.
▪ Always select the largest possible focal spot to skin distance to keep the ab-
sorbed dose for the patient as low as could reasonably be possible.
▪ Always be aware that any material brought into the path of radiation between
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

the patient and the image receptor will have a negative influence on the image
quality as well as increase the patient dose.
▪ Ensure that acoustic and visual communication is established between user
and patient even during exposure, if necessary, by technical means (for in-
stance an intercom).
▪ Safety circuits which may prevent X-radiation from being switched on under
certain conditions may be neither removed nor modified.

2-4 Safety BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


The laser light source 2.6

ID: 19348619
Created by: dep04257
Created: 12.09.2005 11:11:16
Changed by: dep04257
Changed: 12.09.2005 11:11:36
2.6 The laser light source
The laser is a Class 2 laser. Make sure that nobody looks directly into
the light beam.
With Class 2 lasers, the eye is protected by the eyelid closure reflex in
the event of accidental, brief glances into the laser beam. Class 2 lasers
laser aperture
may therefore be used without taking any further precautions, provided
that it is not necessary to either look into the beam intentionally for
longer than 0.25 s nor to repeatedly look into the laser beam or directly
reflected beam. For continuous-duty Class 2 lasers the maximum limit
for accessible radiation is 1 mW.
ID: 17410955
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:39:38
2.7 Disposal
Take-back, proper disposal and recovery of the Medical Device take
place in accordance with the European WEEE Directive (Waste Elec-
trical and Electronic Equipment) and/or respective requirements of
national legislation.
Philips manufactures state-of-the-art X-ray equipment in terms of safety
and environmental protection. Assuming no parts of the system housing
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

are opened and assuming the X-ray equipment is used properly there
are no risks to persons or the environment.
To comply with regulations it is necessary to use materials which may
be harmful to the environment and therefore have to be disposed of in
a proper manner.
For this reason you must not dispose of the X-ray equipment to-
gether with industrial or domestic waste.
Philips
• supports you in disposing of the X-ray equipment described in a
proper manner,
• returns reusable parts to the production cycle via certified disposal
companies and
• thus helps to reduce environmental pollution.

Consequently, do contact your Philips Service Organisation in full con-


fidence.
ID: 45205771
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 16:41:26
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep03476


Changed: 03.03.2006 16:42:40
2.8 Normal use
The columns (tube carriers) BuckyDiagnost CS and BuckyDiagnost FS
are used for making X-ray exposures on a patient table or at a vertical
Bucky, for example.
The BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF are patient tables for supporting and po-
sitioning a patient in the radiation field of a Bucky system. They contain
the image receptor (cassette).

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Safety 2-5


2.9 Prohibited use

The BuckyDiagnost VE/VT and BuckyDiagnost VS are vertical Buckys


for making X-ray exposures – preferably with horizontal and oblique
radiation beam – on patients in the standing, seated or lying position.
They contain the image receptor (cassette).
The BuckyDiagnost Trauma II is a radiography unit for traumatology
and routine skeletal diagnostics and is used as an add-on to the Bucky-
Diagnost CS 2/4. The TRAUMOB X is a patient transport table with
radiolucent table top and is used for
• moving patients comfortably from the ambulance into casualty or to
the bed,
• moving patients within the hospital and for attending to emergen-
cies,
• positioning the patient for fluoroscopy with the C-arm,
• making X-ray exposures.

The Optimus generators are converter generators and controlled by mi-


croprocessors. The basic version consists of a control desk and standard
housing with automatic control and high voltage generator. The control
desk is available without Anatomical Programmed Radiography (APR)
and Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) as well as with APR and/or
AEC.
ID: 45207307
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 16:41:42
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 03.03.2006 16:44:42
2.9 Prohibited use
For reasons of safety two patients must not remain in the examination
room at the same time.

• When the Bucky unit is unfolded you must never use it as a seat or
shelf.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• When making exposures in the seated position the patient must


never stretch his or her legs under the tilted Bucky.
• The patient must not hang from the stretch grip.

2-6 Safety BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


In the event of power outage 2.10

• You must never use the cassette holder as a seat or shelf.


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• You must never use the tube assembly as a seat or shelf.

You must not use the patient transport table TRAUMOB X for the
following purposes or under the following conditions:
• in rooms with magnetic resonance systems
• for moving patients outside buildings
• for supporting patients long-term
• for supporting unconscious patients or patients who are not in con-
trol of themselves without constant supervision
• for loads in excess of 135 kg.

With the Optimus generators you can make diagnostic X-ray exposures
within the scope of their technical data and descriptions.
ID: 45220235
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 16:57:42
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 03.03.2006 16:57:53
2.10 In the event of power outage
In the event of power outage exposures are not possible.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Safety 2-7


2.10 In the event of power outage

Please note:
• Patients may only be positioned when the system is ready for oper-
ation again.
• Patients lying on the table top should remain there until the system
is ready for operation again.
If that is impossible,
˗ move the table top on one side to the stops,
˗ hold the table top steady when the patient is leaving it. (Without
power the table top is freely movable, so in small rooms it could
block e.g. a passage for a trolley or the door of a cubicle).

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

2-8 Safety BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

3 BuckyDiagnost – an overview ........................ 3-3

3.1 What is BuckyDiagnost? .................................................... 3-3


3.2 Functions .......................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Automatic collimation ........................................ 3-3
3.2.2 PBL (Positive Beam Limitation) ......................... 3-3
3.2.3 Defined exposure positions ................................. 3-4
3.2.4 The automatic Bucky (optional) ......................... 3-4
3.2.5 The interchangeable grid .................................... 3-4
3.2.6 Tomography (optional) ...................................... 3-5
3.2.7 Tracking for the SID (optional) .......................... 3-5
3.2.8 Control grip ........................................................ 3-8
3.2.9 The key-operated switch ..................................... 3-8
3.2.10 Tracking for the image receptor .......................... 3-9
3.2.11 Tomography in combination with tracking
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

............................................................................ 3-9
3.2.12 Mode display ...................................................... 3-9
3.2.13 Center position ................................................. 3-10
3.2.14 Automatic size sensing ...................................... 3-10
3.2.15 The Optimus generators ................................... 3-11
3.3 Legend ............................................................................. 3-13
3.3.1 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
.......................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS ....... 3-15
3.3.3 The control grip of the automatic collimator
.......................................................................... 3-17
3.3.4 The control grip of the manual collimator ........ 3-19
3.3.5 The patient tables BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF
.......................................................................... 3-20
3.3.6 The vertical Buckys BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with
ACL4 ................................................................ 3-23
3.3.7 Automatic cassette tray ACL4 ........................... 3-26
3.3.8 The radiography unit BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
.......................................................................... 3-28
3.3.9 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X ....... 3-29
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3.3.10 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS ............. 3-29


3.3.11 BuckyDiagnost VR ........................................... 3-40
3.3.12 The Optimus generators ................................... 3-41
3.3.13 The patient data printer Optimus PDO ........... 3-47

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 3-1


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 36677643
Created by: dep08207

3 BuckyDiagnost – an overview
Created: 13.02.2006 13:41:42
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 13:45:11

ID: 36679179
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 13:41:54
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 13:45:11
3.1 What is BuckyDiagnost?
BuckyDiagnost is the generic term for several components of a family
of devices that can be put together in various constellations to form X-
ray systems.
These Instructions for Use describe the following components:
• the control grips
• the ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
• the mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS
• the patient tables BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF
• the vertical Buckys BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
• the vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS
• the radiography unit BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
• the patient transport table TRAUMOB X

BuckyDiagnost is not a fluoroscopy system.


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 36680331
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 13:42:04
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 13:45:11
3.2 Functions
ID: 36681483
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 13:42:15
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 13:45:11 3.2.1 Automatic collimation
This consists of
• the automatic collimator
• a Bucky with cassette size sensing and
• the extended control grip.

If all the components are at a defined exposure position, the system


detects the size of a cassette inserted and sets the collimator accordingly.
ID: 36682635
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 13:42:19
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 13:45:11 3.2.2 PBL (Positive Beam Limitation)
With a manual collimator, the radiation field changes with the SID
(sourceimage distance). With an automatic collimator, the size of the
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

radiation field – including the field collimated manually – is re-


tained when the SID changes.
If you change the SID by more than 2 cm with PBL after manual col-
limation, collimation to the cassette size takes place again. This function
can be deactivated by Customer Service.
With automatic collimation it is not possible to expose beyond the size
of the cassette.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-3


3.2 Functions

ID: 36732555
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.3 Defined exposure positions
Thanks to the “floating” table top, it only requires one movement to
position the patient in the radiation beam axis, which is faster than
moving both the tube assembly and the Bucky carriage. This system is
therefore designed for the center position of the tube assembly and im-
age receptor. You only have to move the Bucky carriage out of the center
position for a few exposures (e.g. skull, foot).
For more convenient working, Customer Service can set several defined
exposure positions according to the space available. In these exposure
positions the LEDs on the control grip light up and display the locked-
in status.
• At the patient table:
˗ Bucky carriage in the center position (automatic collimation op-
erates throughout the entire range of movement)
˗ tube assembly in the center position (longitudinally and trans-
versely locked-in)
or only transversely locked-in
or only longitudinally locked-in (the automatic Bucky does not
lock in place)
˗ tube assembly at preferred SID (automatic collimation operates
throughout the entire setting range)
˗ the radiation beam axis is vertical.
• Additionally, in the case of tomography:
˗ table height in tomographic position with BuckyDiagnost TH2
(starting position for the tomographic height)
˗ tomographic height.
• At the vertical Bucky:
radiation beam axis is horizontal
˗ locked at SID (several SIDs are possible)
The radiation beam axis is vertical
˗ tube assembly in the center position (longitudinally and trans-
versely locked-in)
˗ with automatic collimation, positioning plate for the defined SID
in the lower position (set by Customer Service)
˗ tube assembly at preferred SID.
• Parking position
˗ e.g. enables the undertable tube assembly in a fluoroscopy unit.
ID: 36733579
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep08207


Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.4 The automatic Bucky (optional)
The motorized cassette transport allows you to conveniently insert and
remove the cassette. The Bucky senses the size of the cassette inserted.
This information is used with the “Automatic sensing” option.
ID: 36734603
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.5 The interchangeable grid
You can change or remove the grid and thus optimally adjust the ex-
posure conditions to the object.

3-4 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Functions 3.2

ID: 36735627
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.6 Tomography (optional)
On the linear tomography unit without coupling rod you can collimate
manually or automatically. For more convenient operation, the longi-
tudinal and swivel movement of the tube assembly and the Bucky
carriage movement are servo-assisted. The tomography parameters can
be selected on the extended control grip.
ID: 36736651
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.7 Tracking for the SID (optional)
Tracking is only possible in conjunction with automatic collimation. It
means the tube assembly and positioning plate of the vertical Bucky or
the tube assembly and table top are synchronized during vertical move-
ment.
According to its purpose, you can use the tracking function when you
are working with the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT auxiliary. On the Buck-
yDiagnost TF you can only use the tracking function on the table for
setting the SID.
What you ought to know about tracking
• The tracking function can only be activated if
˗ the system components are in a defined exposure position
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

˗ the tube assembly is at 0° or 90°


˗ the cassette has been inserted centrally.
• Tracking is protected against collisions. If the tube assembly meets
an obstacle, it stops when a certain force is exceeded. Then it moves
back slightly.
• The SID remains the same when you change the height of the table
top or positioning plate under the following conditions:
˗ table top horizontal,
˗ positioning plate of vertical Bucky horizontal,
˗ the radiation beam axis is vertical.

On BuckyDiagnost TH2

X X
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Fig. 3.1 The SID (X) remains constant.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-5


3.2 Functions

On BuckyDiagnost TF

X X

Fig. 3.2 For tomography, the tracking is adapted to tomography conditions.


Set SID (X).

On BuckyDiagnost CS

Fig. 3.3 Tracking with a horizontal radiation beam axis; left: centered right:
off-center Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-6 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Functions 3.2

On BuckyDiagnost FS

Fig. 3.4 Tracking with a horizontal radiation beam axis; left: centered right:
off-center

On BuckyDiagnost VE/VT and on BuckyDiagnost VS with tilting


feature
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Syste
m

X X

Fig. 3.5 Tracking function with vertical radiation beam axis; the SID (X)
remains constant.

Vertical Bucky
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• If the cassette has been centered when inserting, the tube assembly
will follow so that the radiation beam hits the center of the cassette.
• If a portrait format cassette of at least 24 cm x 30 cm is off-center
when inserted, the tube assembly will follow so that the top edge of
the collimated field remains the same for manual collimation. With
BuckyDiagnost VS, the off-center bottom position is also possible.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-7


3.2 Functions

• With portrait format cassettes of less than 24 cm x 30 cm, off-center


collimation is not possible.
• If the X-ray unit is not vertical when the radiation beam is horizontal,
the tracking function is deactivated. The display on the control grip
shows “Wall stand tilted”.

If the Bucky unit is horizontal and the radiation beam axis is vertical,
the SID is retained when you change the height of the Bucky unit.
Capture range
All the messages appear on the control grip display.
• The “Tracking ready” message indicates that for the auxiliary selected
you can use the tracking function but the tube assembly is still far
away from the exposure position. So that you do not have to move
the tube assembly to the exact exposure position manually, there is
a “capture range”. As soon as the tube assembly is in the capture
range, it is moved to the exact exposure position automatically.
• The capture range is above and below the set SID or the level of the
radiation beam axis if the beam is horizontal. You can activate the
tracking function by manually moving the tube assembly into the
vicinity of the SID or the level of the radiation beam axis if the beam
is horizontal, i.e. into the capture range. If you then let go of the
button to enable tube assembly movements, the tracking function is
activated and moves the tube assembly to the preset SID or to the
level of the cassette if the radiation beam is horizontal.
• The capture range is set by Customer Service.
• Outside the capture range work is manual.
• In the case of “free” exposures with a vertical radiation beam axis you
measure the source-image (or cassette) distance with the tape meas-
ure. The tracking function then moves the tube assembly to your
preferred height.
ID: 36737675
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.8 Control grip
(extended version, part of the “Automatic collimation” and “Tomog-
raphy” options)
The extended version of the control grip is designed for the maximum
system configuration, so that some controls and displays have no func-
tion if the corresponding option is not installed in the system.
With the extended version you can call up a help text on the display by
pressing in the event that you do not receive a ready-for-exposure signal.
Some texts are only of importance for Customer Service and are marked
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

accordingly. You will find a list of help texts in the appendix.


ID: 36738699
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.9 The key-operated switch
(part of the “Automatic collimation” option) You use the key-operated
switch to
• switch the cassette size sensing device off,
• switch the automatic collimation off and
• switch the system over to manual operation.

3-8 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Functions 3.2

You can then


• also use cassettes with non-standard size
• in the event of an error (e.g. if lead type which has fallen into the
Bucky obstructs operation), also continue to work to a restricted
degree at a casualty unit.

To make this operating mode clearly recognizable,


• you cannot remove the key,
• the following appears in the display field
˗ “Restricted use”
˗ the telephone symbol
˗ “M”
ID: 36739723
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.10 Tracking for the image receptor
(optional, part of the “Automatic collimator” and “Tomography” com-
bination)
In combination with tomography, you can carry out motorized move-
ment of the Bucky carriage (center of image receptor) into the radiation
beam axis. The system collimates automatically.
The tracking for the image receptor only functions in systems with to-
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

mography and function enabled by Customer Service.


Precondition:
• after switching on, you have to move the ceiling suspension unit into
the center position (locked-in longitudinally and transversely)
• theradiation beam axis is vertical
• the tube assembly is locked-in transversely if a grid is inserted
ID: 36740747
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.11 Tomography in combination with tracking
There is a starting position for tomographic movement. The tracking
device moves the center-locked tube assembly into the Tomo-SID lock-
in position once. After selecting the tomography unit, the tube assembly
moves into this position. The LED for vertical lock-in is lit. You can
change the table height of the BuckyDiagnost TH2 using the pedals at
the table.
If you cannot activate the tomography unit, an appropriate message
appears. You will find a list of all the possible messages in the appendix.
ID: 36741771
Created by: dep08207
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18


Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.12 Mode display
This displays the currently active mode:
“A” – automatic collimation (sensing)
“AT” – automatic collimation and tracking
“M” – manual
“MT” – manual and tracking

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-9


3.2 Functions

ID: 36742795
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.13 Center position
In the center position the vertical radiation beam axis points to the cen-
ter of the cassette.
• BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF:
the Bucky unit is at the center.
• BuckyDiagnost CS:
˗ longitudinal and transverse carriages are locked at the center.
˗ the system is locked in place in the vertical direction when the
table is at the preferred working height and the standard SID is
set.
• BuckyDiagnost FS:
˗ the column is locked in place in table top center position in the
longitudinal direction.
˗ the tube arm is locked in place in table top center.
˗ the system is locked in place in the vertical direction when the
table is at the preferred working height and the standard SID is
set.

With a manual system or an oblique radiation beam axis you have to


set the center position manually; the mark on the grip of the cassette
tray or on the cassette serves as a guide. A system which has the tracking
function sets the standard SID automatically.
The tracking function can be ordered separately, provided that au-
tomatic cassette size sensing is installed. Automatic cassette size
sensing and the tomography unit cannot be ordered separately.
ID: 36743819
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.14 Automatic size sensing
Cassette tray ACL4
The cassette size is detected during cassette transport.
Manual cassette tray with size sensing
The cassette size is detected as soon as it is inserted into the fully pulled-
out cassette plate (green LED lights up). After the cassette plate is pushed
in, the green LED goes out again briefly, before it lights up again after
another check.
If you have not paid attention to the green LED and not corrected the
position of the cassette when the cassette plate is fully pulled out, you
will hear a brief beeping signal after pushing in the cassette plate to
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

remind you that the cassette was not detected. This saves you the trip
to the generator control desk (and back).
Lead type
The lead type is usually attached directly to the cassette using adhesive
tape, according to requirement. Up to a thickness of 3 mm, there is no
reason not to do this. Use a new strip of adhesive tape each time, as
otherwise the lead type will become detached and fall into the electron-
ics, which may cause serious damage to the Bucky.

3-10 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Functions 3.2

ID: 36744843
Created by: dep08207
Created: 13.02.2006 14:35:18
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 13.02.2006 14:35:18 3.2.15 The Optimus generators
What the generator “is capable of”
In the following table you can see which configurations offer which
exposure techniques:
Exposure Configuration
techniques
Basic ver- with APR with AEC with APR
sion without without without and AEC
APR, AEC AEC APR
kV technique — — + +
kV-mA techni- — — — +
que
TDC — — — +
kV-mAs tech- + + + +
nique
kV-mAs-s + + + +
technique
kV-mA-s tech- — + — +
nique
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Possible configurations
• Basic version
• Also with AEC (Automatic Exposure Control, optional)
• Also with APR (Anatomical Programmed Radiography, optional)
• Also with AEC and APR (optional).

This manual describes all configurations.


Functions of the maximum configuration:
• Exposure techniques
˗ APR with automatic exposure control (AEC)
˗ APR without AEC
• Techiques with automatic exposure control (AEC)
˗ kV technique
˗ with maximum tube power according to the focal spot selected
or
˗ with fixed current within the adjustable values
˗ tomography (TDC, Tomography Density Control)
• Techniques without AEC
˗ kV-mAs technique
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

˗ kV-mA-s technique
˗ kV-mAs-s technique

Other functions
• Change exposure data of an APR program
˗ for the next exposures (without saving)
˗ with subsequent saving
• Save up to 1,000 APR programs
• Adapting the exposure data to the patient’s body

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-11


3.2 Functions

• Area dose product (optional, depends on system)


• Variofocus (optional)
With the Variofocus function you can select a focal spot the prop-
erties of which are between the large and small focal spots. The ratio
of the two focal spots is stated as a percentage of the small focal spot.
“20% SF” means 20% weighted power of the small focal spot and
80% weighted power of the large focal spot. The Variofocus is set
for each APR program during installation.

What you have to know before switching on


• Please observe the instructions on safety and maintenance.
• If the LED of a button
˗ is lit: the function or the auxiliary is activated.
˗ is not lit: the function or the auxiliary is deactivated.
• If you reach a limit, the display goes out briefly and reappears.
• If you change a value and this causes a change in the mAs value, for
example, the new value will be indicated.
• If you wish to change a non-variable value, the value is retained, and
the display goes out briefly and reappears.
• After the end of an exposure there is an audible signal and the actual
exposure data appear for 25 s as a post-exposure display or until the
next operator action (only with AEC).
• You can make up to three exposures a minute in any sequence. When
doing so it is absolutely essential that you observe the tube as-
sembly status display and the information contained in the
Instructions for Use delivered with the tube assembly.
• If you attempt to make a fifth exposure within one minute, it will
not be released. The generator prevents any further exposure for one
minute.
• Exceptions: There is no limitation to four exposures per minute
˗ if you release fluoroscopy within one minute and before the
fourth exposure at the latest or
˗ in the serial mode.

For pediatric exposures please read the note (chapter 3.3.12).


Monitoring system for conditions for shutting down radiography
The generator has a monitoring system which, in the event of an error,
protects against uncontrolled radiation, within the scope of foreseeable
possibilities. With radiography using automatic exposure control this
monitoring system interrupts the radiation if any of the following con-
ditions is met:
• Stage 1: if the mAs value has reached 9.5 times the mAs value of the
APR selected,
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• Stage 2: if after 10% of the maximum permissible exposure time at


least 4% of the expected switch-off dose has not been reached,
• Stage 3: if 600 mAs or 4 s has been reached (the value of 600 mAs
can be set lower by Customer Service).

If you change an APR program temporarily, stages 1 and 2 switch


off. If so, an asterix “*” will appear in the program name
(chapter 4.18.5). Stage 2 remains activated for these 10% of the maxi-
mum exposure time, even stage 3 remains activated. If you wish to accept
the changed program as a fixed program, you must enter the mAs values

3-12 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

to be expected via the mAs technique in order to adapt stages 1 and 2


to the new programming (for reference you will find an exposure table
in the appendix). Then stages 1 and 2 are reactivated.
ID: 36854667
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 11:42:06
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 11:42:34
3.3 Legend
ID: 37692683
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.1 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
The main components
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

1 Ceiling suspension unit


2 Tube assembly
3 Control grip
4 Collimator

Design and functioning


The BuckyDiagnost CS can be freely moved longitudinally and trans-
versely; the telescopic column allows the tube assembly, collimator and
control grip to move vertically up and down.
The directions of movement are color-coded. You will find the colors
next to the corresponding buttons on the control grip and on the ceiling
suspension unit.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-13


3.3 Legend

1 Movement along the table top: green


2 Movement at right angles to the table top: blue
3 Raise/lower: yellow
4 Rotation of tube assembly round its transverse axis: black
5 Rotation of tube assembly round its stand axis: purple
6 Rotation of collimator round the radiation beam axis

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-14 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

ID: 37693707
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.2 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS
The main components

BuckyDiagnost FS S
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

1 Control grip
2 Tube assembly
3 Vertical carriage
4 Collimator
5 Tube arm
6 Swivel joint
7 Column
8 Floor rails
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost FS C
Floor-ceiling or floor-wall version

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-15


3.3 Legend

BuckyDiagnost FS F
Fixed version

1 Raise/lower: yellow
2 Movement at right angles to the table top: blue
3 Rotation of tube assembly round its transverse axis: black
4 Rotation of collimator round the radiation beam axis
5 Swivel of the tube arm: purple
6 Movement along the table top: green

Design and functioning


The BuckyDiagnost FS is a mobile column on rails, and is available in
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

the following versions:


• floor stand
• floor-wall or floor-ceiling stand
• fixed special version without swivel.

The vertical carriage carries the swiveling tube arm, which is available
with or without telescopic extension. The tube arm carries the tube
assembly, the collimator and the control grip.
For the possible movements please refer to the drawing opposite.

3-16 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

The directions of movement are color-coded. You will find the colors
next to the corresponding buttons on the control grip and on the floor
stand (possibly not visible).
ID: 37694731
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.3 The control grip of the automatic collimator

System SID 115 18 x 24 Memory

AT 0 Al Filter

Thorax lat APR

– + 12.0 40 ° 2s Tomo Test

0 30
30
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

1 Display panel
2 Knobs (right/left) for setting the collimator
3 Key-operated switch (not in view)
4 Switch on light field indicator
5 Tape measure for measuring SID
6 Enable button for
• moving the tube assembly longitudinally and
• moving the tube assembly transversely and
• raising/lowering the tube assembly
7 Accessory rails
8 Central laser
9 Slider for covering the SID laser and the central laser
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

10 SID laser (flashing, option)

Button/display Meaning
Ready for exposure

Tube assembly selected

Bucky in the table (AUX 1, auxiliary)

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-17


3.3 Legend

Tomography unit (AUX 2)

Vertical Bucky (AUX 3)

Free cassette (AUX 4)

Decrease/increase tomographic height (from table top)

SID 115 SID in cm (Customer Service can set display to inches).


18 x 24 Radiation area in cm (Customer Service can set display to in-
ches)
AT Mode display
0 Al Added filter
Kidneys AP APR program
12.0 Tomographic height in cm
40° 2s Tomographic angle, Tomographic time
Restricted use Operation with key-operated switch

Collimator
• set to the last value set manually (e.g. after cassette
change)
• set to full size
• Select added filter in the radiation beam or
• Change the value preset by the APR program

Select APR program (4 per auxiliary)

Select tomographic program (angle, time)

• Start test run for tomographic exposure (without radia-


tion)
• Call up help text if “ready for exposure” is not displayed

Switch on light field indicator and both lasers (switch off au-
tomatically); SID laser is lit even if there is a free cassette

30
0 30
Indication of angle when tube assembly is rotated round its
transverse axis
Enable transverse tube assembly movement (blue)

Enable longitudinal tube assembly movement (green)


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Enable rotation of the tube assembly round the column (pur-


ple)
Enable vertical tube assembly movement (yellow)

Enable tube assembly swivel round its transverse axis (black)

3-18 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

ID: 37695755
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.4 The control grip of the manual collimator

1 Rotating disk for added filters


2 Switch on light field indicator
3 Knobs for setting the collimator
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

4 Settings table
5 Enable button for
• moving the tube assembly longitudinally and
• moving the tube assembly transversely and
• raising/lowering the tube assembly
6 Accessory rails
7 Tape measure for measuring SID
8 Central laser
9 Slider for covering the SID laser and the central laser
10 SID laser (flashing, option)
Switch on light field indicator and both lasers (switch off automatically);
SID laser is lit even if there is a free cassette
30
0 30
Indication of angle when tube assembly is rotated round its transverse
axis
Tube assembly selected

Enable transverse tube assembly movement (blue)


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Enable longitudinal tube assembly movement (green)

Enable rotation of the tube assembly round the column (purple)

Enable vertical tube assembly movement (yellow)

Enable tube assembly swivel round its transverse axis (black)

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-19


3.3 Legend

ID: 37696779
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.5 The patient tables BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF
Design and functioning
The BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF series consists of the versions
• BuckyDiagnost TF with fixed table top height and
• BuckyDiagnost TH2 with height-adjustable table top.

Longitudinal and transverse movements of the table top are manual


(TH2 and TF); upward and downward movements are motorized
(TH2). The table has a Bucky unit which can be moved longitudinally
by hand. It is braked electrically.
If the “Tomography” option is installed, movement is servo-assisted.
You can order this table with:
• Cassette tray with manual interchangeable grid
˗ manual
˗ with automatic cassette size sensing
˗ with ACL4:
- automatic cassette loading
- automatic cassette size sensing
- manual interchangeable grid
• Tracking for SID (optional)
• Tracking for the image receptor (optional)
In combination with the tomography unit, you can carry out mo-
torized movement of the Bucky unit into the radiation beam axis.
The system collimates automatically.
• Tomography unit.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-20 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

1 2

3 4 4

6 7 8 9
10 11 12

11 10 12 11

13 14 15

16

Fig. 3.42 Height-adjustable table BuckyDiagnost TH2

1 Floating table top with rails for accessories


2 Handswitch (optional; can be installed anywhere on the rail, including the
rear)
3 Disable footswitches; the button is lit when the function is selected
4 Risk of trapping fingers
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

5 Equipotential bonding pin


6 Parking position for a grid
7 Cassette tray (optional servo assist)
8 Brake lever for cassette tray
9 Center indicator (optional)
10 Lower table top (motorized)
11 • Enable longitudinal and transverse movement of the “floating” table top
• Switch on light field indicator

12 Raise table top (motorized)


You can fold up the footswitches (e.g. to clean the floor)
13 Interchangeable grid
14 Lever for unlocking the cassette plate
15 Yellow LED unlit: no grid is inserted
Yellow LED lit: grid is inserted
Yellow LED flashing:
• inserted grid is not yet in start position
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• error
with cassette size sensing (optional)
Green LED unlit: no cassette inserted
Green LED flashing: cassette inserted, size not detected
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted, size detected
16 Grip of Bucky with centering aid

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-21


3.3 Legend

1 2

3 4 4

5 6 7 8
9

10 11 12

13

Fig. 3.43 Table with fixed height BuckyDiagnost TF

1 Floating table top with rails for accessories


2 Handswitch (optional; can be installed anywhere on the rail, including the
rear)
3 Disable footswitches; the button is lit when the function is selected
4 Risk of trapping fingers
5 Parking position for a grid
6 Cassette tray (optional servo assist)
7 Brake lever for cassette tray
8 Center indicator (optional)
9 • Enable longitudinal and transverse movement of the “floating” table top
• Switch on light field indicator

10 Interchangeable grid
11 Lever for unlocking the cassette plate
12 Yellow LED unlit: no grid is inserted
Yellow LED lit: grid is inserted
Yellow LED flashing:
• inserted grid is not yet in start position
• error
with cassette size sensing (optional)
Green LED unlit: no cassette inserted
Green LED flashing: cassette inserted, size not detected
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted, size detected
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

13 Grip of Bucky with centering aid

3-22 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

1
2

4 2 2 5

Fig. 3.44 The manual cassette tray

1 Mark for centering the cassette


2 Cassette clamping device
3 Mark for centering the tube assembly opposite the cassette tray if cassette is
inserted centrally
4 Sensor for cassette size sensing (optional)
5 Holder for cassettes (and sensor for cassette size sensing (optional))

ID: 37697803
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.6 The vertical Buckys BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

These Instructions for Use describe the BuckyDiagnost VT with oper-


ation of the Bucky from the left-hand side. A unit with the controls on
the righthand side must be operated accordingly.
Design and functioning
The BuckyDiagnost VE/VT series consists of the versions described
below:
• BuckyDiagnost VE
This consists of a column carrying the Bucky unit, which can be
moved vertically. The unit is available for operation from the left or
right side. You can attach the stretch grip on the left or right, and
you can attach accessories to the rails on the front panel.
• BuckyDiagnost VT
This unit is operated in exactly the same way as the BuckyDiagnost
VE; in addition, you can tilt the Bucky unit.
• Both the BuckyDiagnost VE and the BuckyDiagnost VT can be
equipped with
˗ a cassette tray with automatic cassette loading/ejection (ACL4)
with
- automatic size sensing and
- a grid,
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

˗ tracking and remote-controlled collimator.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-23


3.3 Legend

Fig. 3.45 BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-24 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

1 BABIX holder (optional accessory), maximum load: 10 kg


2 Column
3 Stretch grip for lateral exposures (optional accessory), maximum load:
25 kg
Grips for PA exposures (optional accessory)
4 Angle of tilt displayed on both sides (BuckyDiagnost VT)
5 Chin rest
6 Raise/lower Bucky unit
7 Position of the automatic exposure control measuring fields
8 Accessory rails
9 Open front panel
10 Tilt Bucky unit (BuckyDiagnost VT only)
Maximum load of horizontal Bucky unit: 25 kg
11 If tracking (optional accessory) is installed:
Open collimator vertically

Close collimator vertically

Open collimator horizontally


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Close collimator horizontally

Switch on light field indicator

12 Operation and display of ACL4

Fig. 3.51 The stop in the BuckyDiagnost VT


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

1 Lever for setting the stop


Right-hand lever: stop at -20°
Left-hand lever: stop at 0° (front panel vertical)

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-25


3.3 Legend

ID: 37698827
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.7 Automatic cassette tray ACL4
1

3 1 2 3 4 5

5
6

Fig. 3.52 Controls

1 Rail for grid insertion


2 Grid
3 Color-coded grid grip (see chapter 7.12)
4 Cassette carriage slit
5 Input aid and release device
6 • Cover (table)
• Only close front panel here (vertical Bucky)

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-26 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

2
3
2

Fig. 3.53 Displays

1 Switch over cassette position (only on vertical Bucky):


Position the cassette centrally/off-center in the Bucky at the top. Select the
cassette position with the cassette carriage moved out. If the cassette is al-
ready positioned, you can only move it once.
2 Yellow LED:
Position cassette off-center.
Depending on whether you have a left or right-handed version, one of the
two LEDs lights up (only on vertical Bucky).
3 Green LED: Cassette is positioned.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• LED flashes slowly: cassette is being transported


• LED flashes quickly: positioning error; remove cassette and reinsert
• LED lit: cassette is positioned
4 Green LED:
grid is fully inserted
5 Open and close cassette tray
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-27


3.3 Legend

ID: 37699851
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.8 The radiography unit BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
The main components

1 Ceiling suspension unit


2 Control grip
3 Tube assembly
4 Collimator
5 Tube arm
6 Cassette holder

Design and functioning


The BuckyDiagnost Trauma II consists of a column carrying the cassette
holder and the tube assembly with collimator and control grip. The
following drawing shows the movements the unit can make.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-28 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

ID: 37700875
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.9 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X
Design and functioning
The height of the table top can be adjusted, so the patient, along with
the mattress for instance, can be conveniently transferred from the
TRAUMOB X to an examination table. It is just as simple to adjust the
table to the height of the mattress at the bedside.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

2 2
1

4 4

1 Table top, removable


2 Grip with lever to unlock the height adjustment
3 Pedal to lock, unlock and brake the swivelling castors
4 Swivelling castors
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Fig. 3.57 Table movements


ID: 37701899
Created by: dep08207
Created: 17.02.2006 17:18:36
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 17.02.2006 17:18:36 3.3.10 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS
These Instructions for Use describe the BuckyDiagnost VS with oper-
ation from the left-hand side. A right-handed unit must be operated

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-29


3.3 Legend

accordingly. By operation, changing the grids and cassettes is meant. All


other controls are on both sides of the unit – except in the basic package.
Design and functioning
The most basic configuration of the BuckyDiagnost VS (BuckyDiag-
nost VS (basic package)) consists of a column with a vertical carriage
carrying the Bucky unit with interchangeable grid. Depending on the
version you have, it can be operated from left or right. A stretch grip is
optionally available, which is fixed to the column.
The following versions are available:
• for cassettes (film or PCR)
• with integrated digital detector (only with certain options).
• BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package)
It is the more user-friendly version with the following extras:
˗ Integrated storage for grids that are not in use (max. 2)
˗ Measuring field group selection
˗ Operation using controls mounted on the right and left
˗ Facility for adding on other options.
• Option “tilting”
It also allows:
˗ motorized tilting of the Bucky unit
˗ 2nd function
Tilting must only be started up; it then stops automatically in one
of three defined positions.
• Option “motorized height adjustment”
It is standard with the digital wall stand and allows:
˗ Vertical movement of the Bucky unit, either manually (counter-
balanced) or motorized with two speeds.
˗ Wireless remote control
˗ 2nd function
Vertical movement must only be started up; it then stops auto-
matically in one of four defined positions.

A combination of “tilting” and “motorized height adjustment” is pos-


sible. Then you can move the tube assembly to the desired SID during
automatic movement of the Bucky unit from the horizontal to the ver-
tical position, for instance.
The BuckyDiagnost VS with digital detector always includes:
• BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package)
• motorized height adjustment
• remote control.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-30 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

The components

4
5

8
6

(A)
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

10
(B)

(C)

11

1 Column
2 Control unit, left and right (BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package))
3 Display (optional, in combination with the digital detector)
4 Bucky unit and cassette plate or digital detector (tiltable if required, optional)
5 Spacer (optional)
6 Remote control (part of the option “motorized height adjustment”)
7 Charging station for the remote control (mounted on the column) (optional)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8 Grip with button to release the brakes (BuckyDiagnost VS (basic package))


9 Patient grips (right and left, BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package))
10 Measuring field display (on generator, BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced pack-
age))
11 Centering panels; measuring chamber accessory for SID = 110 cm and SID
= 180 cm; mounted on the accessory rails of the collimator

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-31


3.3 Legend

The manual cassette tray

1
2 3 4

1 Grip of the cassette tray


2 Mark for centering the tube assembly opposite the cassette tray if cassette is
inserted centrally
3 Cassette clamping device
4 Mark for centering the cassette
5 Sensor for cassette size sensing (optional)
6 Holder for cassettes (and sensor for cassette size sensing (optional))

The control unit and the remote control


• The control unit is available in three versions depending on the unit
you have ordered.
The three versions are equipped as follows:
˗ BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package): 2+3+7
˗ additional “tilting” option 1+2+3+6+7
˗ additional “motorized height adjustment” option: 1+2+3+4+5+6
+7 (standard with digital detector)
• The remote control is part of the option “motorized height adjust-
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

ment”.

3-32 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006 4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1
BuckyDiagnost – an overview
Legend

3-33
3.3
3.3 Legend

(A)

(B)

(C)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-34 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

No. Symbol Meaning


1 Auxiliary (AUX) selected

LED lit: tracking on (press AUX twice)

Select auxiliary

2 Select measuring field group:


Of the 5 measuring fields which the exposure measuring cham-
ber has, a group of three is selected at any one time. You select
the measuring fields by selecting an APR program or by selecting
the measuring fields on the generator.
The LEDs indicate which measuring fields are active

The display shows the active measuring fields.


The outer measuring fields are always automatically deactivated
if they are outside the collimated field. In conjunction with
tracking the following situations may arise:
Selection: Measuring chamber orientation to top
• The three top measuring fields are active.
• “Bottom off-center collimation” is selected.
• The tube assembly moves down.
• The LEDs for the top two measuring fields go out.
Selection: Measuring chamber orientation to right
• The three right measuring fields are active.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• “Bottom off-center collimation” is selected.


• The tube assembly moves down.
• The LED for the top right measuring field goes out.
or
• “Top off-center collimation” is selected.
• The tube assembly moves up.
• The LED for the bottom right measuring field goes out.
Selection: Measuring chamber orientation to bottom
• The three bottom measuring fields are active.
• “Top off-center collimation” is selected.
• The tube assembly moves up.
• The LEDs for the bottom two measuring fields go out.
Selection: Measuring chamber orientation to left
• The three left measuring fields are active.
• “Bottom off-center collimation” is selected.
• The tube assembly moves down.
• The LED for the top left measuring field goes out.
or
• “Top off-center collimation” is selected.
• The tube assembly moves up.
• The LED for the bottom left measuring field goes out.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3 Switch on light field indicator

Set collimator

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-35


3.3 Legend

4 Memory
Collimator
• set to the last value set manually
• set to full size; to default with digital detector
Switch from vertical to horizontal and vice versa (only on the
version with digital detector)
(only with tracking on the version with digital detector);
Press once: the current status is shown
Press twice: switch between centered and off-center collima-
tion.
After a button is pressed on the remote control, the LEDs light
up briefly.
Top off-center col-
limation:
Radiation field lies
at top of detector
field

Centered collima-
tion

Bottom off-center
collimation:
Radiation field lies
at bottom of detec-
tor field

5 1st function: raise Bucky unit slowly (motorized) 1


2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the top ver-
tical position (type: lung position) 2
1st function: raise Bucky unit quickly (motorized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves upward to -20°
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

(type: skull position) 2


1st function: lower Bucky unit slowly (motorized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the bottom
vertical position (type: knee etc.) 2
1st function: lower Bucky unit quickly (motorized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the bottom
horizontal position (type: table position) 2

3-36 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

6 1st function: tilt Bucky unit into the horizontal position (mo-
torized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the horizon-
tal position 2
1st function: tilt Bucky unit into the vertical position (motor-
ized) 1
2nd function: 2
• detector not vertical: detector moves into the vertical po-
sition. The height remains the same.
• detector vertical: detector moves to -20°. The height re-
mains the same.
Select 2nd function 2

7 Raise/lower the Bucky unit (manual)

8 Charging indicator; if it flashes for approx. 5 s after a button is


pressed: charge battery; the charging indicator flashes during
charging.

1
Dead man's principle – the unit only moves if a button is pressed and
held down.
2
Switch on 2nd function with buttons 5 and 6. The lock-ins of the 2nd
function are preset by the manufacturer; Customer Service can change
them.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-37


3.3 Legend

The exposure unit


1

2
3

4 5 6

Fig. 3.88 BuckyDiagnost VS (basic package)

1 Chin rest
2 Grip of Bucky with centering aid
3 Grid slit
4 “Eject grid” button
5 Image center marks by way of a guide for inserting a cassette off-center
6 Display of the position of the automatic exposure control measuring fields
7 LEDs
Yellow LED on: grid is inserted and detected
Yellow LED flashing: error, grid not detected or
- grid not in start position or
- self-test after inserting the grid
Yellow LED unlit: no grid inserted
Green LED unlit: no cassette inserted
Green LED flashing: cassette inserted, size not detected
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted
8 Grip with button to release the brake for vertical movement
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-38 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

The exposure unit

Tracking

Memory

Fig. 3.89 BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package)

1 Chin rest
2 Flap of storage slot for grids (hidden)
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

3 Grip of Bucky with centering aid


4 Grid slit
5 “Eject grid” button
LEDs
Yellow LED on: grid is inserted and detected Yellow LED flashing: error, grid
not detected or
- grid not in start position or
- self-test after inserting the grid
Yellow LED unlit: no grid inserted
Green LED unlit: no cassette inserted
Green LED flashing: cassette inserted, size not detected
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted
6 Image center marks by way of a guide for inserting a cassette off-center
7 Display of the position of the automatic exposure control measuring fields
8 Grips
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-39


3.3 Legend

The stretch grip

Fig. 3.90 for BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package) (optional)


ID: 38207755
Created by: dep08207
Created: 20.02.2006 18:51:41
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:51:41 3.3.11 BuckyDiagnost VR
The BuckyDiagnost VR combines BuckyDiagnost components to form
a special workstation for vertical radiography.
At its most basic, it can form a workstation purely for thorax exposures
with a fixed tube carrier BuckyDiagnost FS but also a combination of
ceiling suspension unit BuckyDiagnost CS with tracking and Bucky-
Diagnost VS with motorized vertical drive and tilting unit.
All these systems have automatic collimation.
A Bucky table is not part of the system.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-40 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

The Babix holder


Customer Service
• mounts the Babix holder at the desired height
• sets the Babix holder to the necessary length.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 38208779
Created by: dep08207
Created: 20.02.2006 18:51:41
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:51:41 3.3.12 The Optimus generators
Optimus 30/50/65/80
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-41


3.3 Legend

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

mA-s 8 Rese t

AEC 13
70 kV 25 mAs 50 ms
14 19
9
10 11 12
– + – + – +
15 20

Sella Turcica ap = Sella Turcica lat

Orbitae pa 30 Foramen Opticu m

24
16 21 Mastoid Schuell. Os Pet rosa Stenv.

17 22 Mastoid Mayer menu

18 23 25 26 27

The displays illustrated are examples.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-42 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

1 Switch off generator


2 Switch on generator
3 Select exposure technique
4 Ready for exposure
5 Radiation is switched on
6 Display of the tube assembly state
7 Incorrect exposure indicator
8 Reset functions
9 Switch on/off automatic exposure control
10 Selection and display of exposure voltage
11 Selection and display of exposure current or of the exposure current-
time product
12 Selection and display of exposure time
13 Call up different levels
14 Auxiliary Bucky in the table
15 Wall Bucky auxiliary
16 Small focus
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

17 Variofocus
18 Large focus
19 Tomography auxiliary
20 Free cassette auxiliary
21-23 Select automatic exposure control measuring fields
24 Display
25 Slim patient
26 Stout patient
27 Scroll through the display pages

The exposure switch has two positions.


Position 1:
Preparation - The green Ready indicator goes out.
When it lights up again:
Position 2:
Release exposure.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

You can press the button straight through to the second position. After
the preparation time the exposure is released. Keep the button pressed
until the end of exposure or else the exposure will be aborted. Never
press the button more than three times in one minute. In this way
you will extend the life of the X-ray tube.
Specially for pediatric exposures and casualty departments, for example,
Customer Service can program the preparation time to 30 s for each
tube selected. Preparation remains on even after letting go of the expo-

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-43


3.3 Legend

sure button from the “Preparation” stage, provided no exposure has


been released.
After exposure, preparation is switched off
The upper display
Display and selection of the generator data.
Green Ready lamp: ready for exposure

Radiation is switched on

Display of the tube assembly state


(depending on system and tube assembly, please also observe the in-
structions in the Instructions for Use for the X-ray tube assembly).
Color(s) Meaning
green Full power available
yellow + green The tube assembly is warm, full power available
yellow Up to 80% of the full power is available
yellow + red Up to 64% of the full power is available
red The thermo safety switch in the tube assembly is activated:
– exposure not possible

Incorrect exposure indicator; if it flashes


• you have let go of the exposure switch prematurely:
Press this
or
• the limit of exposure time or mAs has been reached:

Press this
or
• the exposure has been aborted owing to incorrect exposure (incorrect
exposure early warning system):

Press this

The lower display

(line 1 , column 1 ) (line 1 , column 2 )

(line 2 , column 1 ) (line 2 , column 2 )


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

(line 3 , column 1 ) (line 3 , column 2 )

(line 4 , column 1 ) (line 4 , column 2 )

Display and selection of the APR programs, the current selection is


highlighted.

3-44 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

If there is an APR menu, “Menu” appears on line 4, column 2. You can


call it up with the corresponding button.
Scroll through pages if the LED is lit and at least two pages have been
programmed. After the last page the first page displayed reappears.
If, after scrolling, you press the exposure switch to “Preparation” the
following appear:
• the APR program last selected
• the appropriate exposure data.

If you have changed the data of a program, an asterisk appears after the
name of the program. The modified data remain intact (even if you
change the auxiliary for example) until you select the same program
again or a different one.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-45


3.3 Legend

Optimus 30 (single-phase generator)


13 14

1 2

888 888 888 888 88


kVp mAs mA s

3 4 – + – + – + – + – + RESET 20

6 15 16 17 18 19
5

25

21 22 23 24 26

7 10
27
8 11

9 12
28 29

1 Switch off generator


2 Switch on generator
3 Bucky unit
4 Tomography unit
5 Wall Bucky
6 Free cassette
7-9 Select automatic exposure control measuring fields
10-12 Film-screen sensitivity
13 Ready for exposure
14 Radiation is switched on
15 Selection and display of exposure voltage
16 Selection and display of mAs
17 Selection and display of exposure current
18 Selection and display of exposure time
19 Selection and display of density correction
20 Reset functions
21 Child
22 Slim patient
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

23 Normal patient
24 Stout patient
25 Large focus
26 Small focus
27 APR display
28 Prepare exposure
29 Release exposure

3-46 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

The upper display


Display and selection of the generator data.
Green Ready lamp: ready for exposure

Radiation is switched on.

The lower display

(line 1 , column 1 ) (line 1 , column 2 )

(line 2 , column 1 ) (line 2 , column 2 )

(line 3 , column 1 ) (line 3 , column 2 )

(line 4 , column 1 ) (line 4 , column 2 )

Display and selection of the APR programs, the current selection is


highlighted.
If there is an APR menu, “Menu” appears on line 4, column 2. You can
call it up with the corresponding button.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

If, after scrolling, you press the exposure switch to “Preparation” the
following appear:
• the APR program last selected
• the appropriate exposure data.

If you have changed the data of a program, an asterisk appears after the
name of the program. The modified data remain intact (even if you
change the auxiliary for example) until you select the same program
again or a different one.
ID: 38209803
Created by: dep08207
Created: 20.02.2006 18:51:41
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:51:41 3.3.13 The patient data printer Optimus PDO
The keyboard
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

¬ ! " £ $ % ^ & ( ) + Inse rt Hom e Pag e Num + × –


_
2 3
Up Lock
^ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 { 8 9 0 } - =

Q W E R T Y U I O P { } Dele te End Pag e 7 8 9 +


Down
[ ] Hom e Pg Up

Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L : @ ´ 4 5 6

; # —

| Z X C V B N M < > ? 1 2 3 Enter

' m , . / End PgDn

Ctr Alt Ctr Alt Gr 0 ,


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Ins De

The table only shows the important keys for operation.


Activate next entry field

Activate previous entry field

Activate/deactivate menu bar

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-47


3.3 Legend

Is the same as the “OK” button

Cancel selection or
close window

• Move cursor in the entry fields


• Switch between the examination rooms in the “Room”
window
• Select exposure number in “Series” field
• Select an entry from a list
• Select from a menu bar

Space bar For switching the check panels for the printer/file on/off in the
“OUTPUT” panel

The following program-specific commands are assigned to the function


keys:
F1 Show function key assignment
F2 Is the same as the function “EDIT”
F3 Is the same as the function “VIEW”
F4 Is the same as the function “NEW”
Change patient and enter new patient data using the standard input
device
F5 Change display to Room 1
F6 Change display to Room 2
F7 Change display to Room 3
F8 Not assigned
F9 Change patient and enter new patient data using the input file
F10 Change patient and import new patient data from a chip card
F11 Change patient and enter new patient data using the keyboard or scan
them in using a barcode reader
F12 Simulate exposure in the “Test” mode.
Ctrl + N Activate “Series” selection list
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-48 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

The data mask (example)

The screen is structured as follows:


• Top edge:
The menu bar appears here.
• Bottom edge:
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

The status bar appears here.


• “PATIENT” panel:
This contains the patient data and the examination room.
• “EXAMINATION” panel:
This contains the exposure data.
• “OUTPUT” panel:
Here you can select the output device.
(“place a cross in the” check box)

Some of the screen layouts are identical.


By clicking the mouse on the screen you can do the following
open system menu
reduce window to symbol
enlarge symbol to full screen
change the window to previous size
scroll through a list.
The scroll bar appears if
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• the list has more lines than can be displayed in the window
or
• the lines are longer than the width of the window.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-49


3.3 Legend

As an alternative to the mouse, you can use the keyboard to open certain
windows. To do so, you have to press “Alt” and press the underlined
letter.
There are words in the menu bar, which you must click to open other
menus.
Generator and possibly DIAMENTOR messages appear in the status
bar.
You call up functions assigned to buttons (e.g. “NEW”, “VIEW” in the
data mask) by clicking on them with the mouse.
Meaning of the entry fields and buttons:
Menu bar
File This contains the submenu “File”.
Configuration This contains the submenu “Configuration”.
Help In this submenu
• you find out a little about the meaning of the function keys
• you obtain further information
Panel “PATIENT”
NEW • Change patient and enter new patient data using the standard
input device.
• Reset generator and possibly DIAMENTOR (RESET).
• Save and print patient data and exposure parameters.
• Delete patient data and exposure parameters for the select-
ed examination room.
VIEW Show a patient's data without changing patient.
This button only appears if you have not configured the keyboard
as the standard input device.
EDIT This button does the same as function key F2. This allows you
to enter patient data into the patient data fields using the key-
board after the exposure. You can turn this function on/off in
the “Configuration/Main options” menu. This button is not visi-
ble when it is turned off.
Room 1 Examination room 1
Room 2 Examination room 2
Room 3 Examination room 3
Name Patient's surname
First name Patient's first name
Date of birth Patient's date of birth
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Sex Patient's sex; possible entries: M, F


Patient ID Patient-specific number
RIS ID The patient number assigned by RIS
Examination Examination
Ref. doctor Referring doctor, referring institution
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Remarks Field for any remarks
Panels “EXAMINATION” and “OUTPUT”

3-50 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Legend 3.3

Series Number of examination series


Select number of examination series

Exposure(s) Number of exposures in the series


APR name Name of APR program
APR no. Number of APR program
Film format Film size in cm x cm
Auxiliary Selected auxiliary
SID Source image distance in cm
kV Exposure voltage
mAs mAs product
Fluor. time Fluoroscopy time
Area dose Area dose in cGycm2
Printer 1 Output on printer 1
Printer 2 Output on printer 2
File Save data to output file
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 BuckyDiagnost – an overview 3-51


3.3 Legend

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

3-52 BuckyDiagnost – an overview BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

4 Operation ........................................................ 4-3

4.1 The quick way to great exposures ...................................... 4-3


4.2 Moving the tube assembly ................................................. 4-4
4.2.1 Movements ......................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Tips to easily position the tube assembly with the
control grip ......................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Center the tube assembly opposite the Bucky or the
free cassette ......................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Setting SID with second laser for free exposure
technique and oblique exposures (optional)
............................................................................ 4-8
4.3 Manual collimator ........................................................... 4-10
4.3.1 Selecting added filters ....................................... 4-10
4.3.2 Measuring the SID ........................................... 4-10
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

4.3.3 Collimating ...................................................... 4-11


4.4 Automatic collimator ....................................................... 4-12
4.4.1 Cassette size sensing .......................................... 4-12
4.4.2 Selecting added filters ....................................... 4-13
4.4.3 SID display ....................................................... 4-13
4.4.4 Collimating ...................................................... 4-15
4.5 Operating the extended version ....................................... 4-16
4.5.1 Selecting auxiliary ............................................. 4-16
4.5.2 Selecting APR program ..................................... 4-17
4.6 Moving the table top ....................................................... 4-18
4.7 Moving BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 .................... 4-19
4.8 Moving BuckyDiagnost VS ............................................. 4-20
4.8.1 Movements ....................................................... 4-20
4.8.2 Raising/lowering Bucky unit ............................. 4-21
4.8.3 Tilting Bucky unit ............................................ 4-22
4.8.4 Moving Bucky unit into the factory-set default
position ............................................................ 4-23
4.8.5 Positioning patient ............................................ 4-25
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4.9 Changing manual cassette tray ......................................... 4-26


4.9.1 Preconditions .................................................... 4-26
4.9.2 At the table ....................................................... 4-26
4.9.3 On the BuckyDiagnost VS with Bucky unit
.......................................................................... 4-28
4.10 Automatic cassette tray ACL4 .......................................... 4-31
4.10.1 Risk of tripping fingers ..................................... 4-31
4.10.2 The reset function ............................................. 4-31
4.10.3 Changing the cassette ....................................... 4-32

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 4-1


Table of contents

4.11 Changing grids on the ACL4 ........................................... 4-33


4.11.1 At the table ....................................................... 4-33
4.11.2 On the vertical Bucky ....................................... 4-35
4.11.3 On the BuckyDiagnost VS ............................... 4-37
4.11.4 Storing / removing grids ................................... 4-38
4.12 Operation of tracking ...................................................... 4-38
4.12.1 Tracking for the SID ........................................ 4-38
4.12.2 Tracking for the image receptor ........................ 4-39
4.12.3 Changing auxiliaries .......................................... 4-40
4.13 Tomography (optional) ................................................... 4-40
4.14 Releasing an exposure ...................................................... 4-42
4.15 In the event of an error .................................................... 4-42
4.16 Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II .......................... 4-43
4.16.1 Cassette holder ................................................. 4-43
4.16.2 Moving unit ..................................................... 4-45
4.16.3 When you are working on the BuckyDiagnost TH or
the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT/VS ......................... 4-47
4.16.4 Preferred working positions .............................. 4-47
4.17 Operation of TRAUMOB X ........................................... 4-49
4.17.1 Abort patient positioning .................................. 4-49
4.17.2 Inserting table top ............................................. 4-49
4.17.3 Moving unit ..................................................... 4-49
4.17.4 How the brake works ........................................ 4-50
4.17.5 Raising/lowering the table top .......................... 4-50
4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 .......... 4-50
4.18.1 Operation of all configurations ......................... 4-50
4.18.2 Operation of the basic configuration ................. 4-51
4.18.3 Operation with AEC, without APR .................. 4-53
4.18.4 Operation with APR, without AEC .................. 4-55
4.18.5 APR records ...................................................... 4-55
4.18.6 Operation with AEC and APR ......................... 4-59
4.18.7 Tomography ..................................................... 4-63
4.18.8 Dose display (optional, depends on system)
.......................................................................... 4-67
4.19 Operation of the patient data printer Optimus PDO
......................................................................................... 4-68
4.19.1 Activating the output device ............................. 4-68
4.19.2 Setting exposure data ........................................ 4-68
4.19.3 Positioning patient ............................................ 4-68
4.19.4 Selecting examination room .............................. 4-68
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4.19.5 Recording new patient data .............................. 4-68


4.19.6 Editing patient data .......................................... 4-70
4.19.7 Releasing exposure ............................................ 4-70
4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30 ....... 4-71
4.20.1 Operation – in a few words ............................... 4-71
4.20.2 Operation in detail ........................................... 4-72

4-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 38285067
Created by: dep08207

4 Operation
Created: 21.02.2006 11:35:07
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 11:46:52

ID: 38286603
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 11:36:27
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 11:46:52
4.1 The quick way to great exposures
Radiograp hy Tom ograp hy

Switch on system an d, if
ne cessa ry, rem ove casset te

Select auxiliary (AUX): Select tom ograp hy


Bucky in the table ( AUX 1) attachme nt (AUX 2)
wall column (AUX 3)
”free”casset te (AUX 4)
or casset te holde r

Set SID and, if Prepa re unit for


ne cessa ry, set p referred tom ographic exposu re
working heig ht
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Insert casset te Insert casset te

Aim tube assembl y


at casset te

Position p atient Position p atient

Collimate, if necessa ry set to Collimate, if necessa ry set to


previous manual collimation previous manual collimation

Select APR programm e Select APR programm e


(contains filter selection ) (contains filter selection )

Select or change fil ter, Select or change fil ter,


if necessa ry if necessa ry

Select tom ograp hy programm e


Select tom ograp hy height

Start test run

Set exposu re data or Set exposu re data or


adapt to the p atient adapt to the p atient
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Release exposu re

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-3


4.2 Moving the tube assembly

ID: 38288139
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 11:42:25
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 11:43:02
4.2 Moving the tube assembly
ID: 38940427
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.2.1 Movements
▶ Move tube assembly transversely (blue)
LED lights up when locked in place.

▶ Move tube assembly longitudinally (green)


LED lights up when locked in place.

▶ Rotate the tube assembly round the stand axis (purple, elec-
trical enable)
LED lights up when locked in place.

▶ Rotate the tube assembly round the stand axis manually (pur-
ple)
• On BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ • On BuckyDiagnost FS

4-4 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving the tube assembly 4.2

▶ Raise/lower tube assembly (yellow, only on BuckyDiagnost CS


2/4)
LED lights up when locked in place.

▶ Swivel tube assembly round its transverse axis (black)


The scale indicates the angle,
LED lights up when locked in place.

▶ Move tube assembly freely:


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• longitudinally and
• transversely and
• vertically.
Lock-in postions (if set) in
- center position,
- parking position,
- SID position.

▶ Rotate collimator
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-5


4.2 Moving the tube assembly

ID: 38941451
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.2.2 Tips to easily position the tube assembly with the control
grip
▶ The button to enable longitudinal, transverse and vertical move-
ment is positioned at the lowest point on the control grip. So you
can lower even a tube assembly that is parked high above without
a ladder.

▶ For longitudinal and transverse movement, you can grip and


move the tube assembly with two hands. You can enable move-
ment with one finger, without having to take your hand off the
control grip.

▶ If you want to move the tube assembly a longer distance, e.g.


when changing from the Bucky table to the vertical Bucky, then
you should first rotate the tube assembly and lower it to elbow
height. Then you can move it conveniently with one hand.

ID: 38942475
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.2.3 Center the tube assembly opposite the Bucky or the free
cassette

Do not look directly into the laser beam.


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

DANGER

4-6 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving the tube assembly 4.2

Center position
▶ Lock in tube assembly longitudinally and transversely.

▶ Set the radiation beam axis to vertical.


▶ Rotate the collimator so that the sides of the radiation field are
parallel to the table edge.
▶ Move the Bucky unit to the center position.

At the patient table outside the center position


▶ Switch on the center laser
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Move the tube assembly longitudinally to the table top so that


the center laser is aimed at the mark on the grip of the cassette
tray or the center indicator in the case of the automatic cassette
tray (radiation beam axis vertical or oblique).
If the mark is concealed:
• Pull the cassette tray out of the Bucky slightly
or
• move the table top transversely.
Alternatively, you can move the tube assembly instead of the
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

table top. Provided you only move it transversely, the SID will
be retained.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-7


4.2 Moving the tube assembly

▶ If you wish to continue working with automatic cassette size


sensing, the radiation beam axis must hit the image receptor ver-
tically so that the size is collimated correctly.
Mode display: “A”
“A” means:
• vertical radiation beam axis
• correctly collimated size

On the vertical Bucky


▶ Adjust the Bucky or the tube assembly so that the laser is aimed
at the mark.
With automatic cassette size sensing there is a lock-in position
for the horizontal radiation beam axis (front panel vertical) and
a lock-in position for the vertical axis (front panel horizontal (op-
tional)). With the horizontal object plate the automatic collima-
tor control is only activated when the table top is at the bottom
defined position.
Mode display: “A”

ID: 38943499
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.2.4 Setting SID with second laser for free exposure technique
and oblique exposures (optional)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Free exposure technique:


Exposure directly on the cassette; without automatic exposure control
you can use the MCS (Movable Cassette Stand) as a cassette holder.

4-8 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving the tube assembly 4.2

▶ For the free exposure technique you can have a fixed SID (X)
Sys t e m

set on your unit. For this purpose two laser beams, the center
laser and the SID laser (flashing), are adjusted so that the SID is
defined by their point of intersection.
When making oblique beam exposures the SID laser is particu-
larly helpful because you can set the SID at the same time as the
angle. There is no need for measurement or correction.
For a system with automatic collimation you must transfer the
set SID to the system with the tape measure, so that the size of
the radiation field can be displayed correctly.

X Mode display: “M”

▶ Switch on both lasers.


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Open exits, if necessary.


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-9


4.3 Manual collimator

▶ Rotate the tube assembly to the required angle; then move it hor-
izontally and vertically so that the two lines coincide.

ID: 38944523
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
4.3 Manual collimator
ID: 38945547
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.3.1 Selecting added filters
Philips recommends:
that you use an added filter to reduce radiation exposure, especially for
X-ray exposures performed on children.

0 mm Al
2 mm Al
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al

ID: 38946571
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.3.2 Measuring the SID
▶ Pull out the tape measure parallel to the radiation beam axis as
far as the cassette.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Read off the SID.


Please note:
At a SID of less than 97 cm the film size of 43 cm x 43 cm will

4-10 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Manual collimator 4.3

not be fully exposed. Ratio and f0 of the grid used also limit the
usable SID (chapter 7.12).
ID: 38947595
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.3.3 Collimating

NOTE Use the smallest possible collimation in order to avoid unnecessary radiation ex-
posure and to achieve the best image quality (due to lower radiation scatter).

The following table shows you the values you must set on the collimator
for a known SID and a known radiation field:

Example
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

(The relevant figures are highlighted in the table)


SID = 115 cm
Radiation field: 24 cm x 30 cm
Values to be set: 21 and 26.5
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-11


4.4 Automatic collimator

ID: 38948619
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
4.4 Automatic collimator
ID: 38949643
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.4.1 Cassette size sensing
When the radiation beam axis is perpendicular to the image receptor,
A 24 x 30
the system automatically collimates to the size of the cassette inserted.
If you change the SID, the collimation will be adapted automatically
(VE/VT lockin positions).

(example)

With the combination of “Automatic beam limitation” and “Dose calculation and
display”, the system requires the current SID and the exposed radiation field. For
this reason, with oblique projection and free cassette, you must transfer the SID
to the system by measuring with the tape measure.
CAUTION

▶ When the radiation beam axis is oblique to the Bucky grid, the
M SID ??
unit remains ready for exposure. You must collimate manually.
Please use the tape measure. There are two possibilities:
Starting point:
• The radiation beam axis is vertical
measure SID man.
• Cassette inserted

(example)

▶ Swivel tube assembly.


• Collimation is retained (incl. any additional manual collima-
tion).
• System enable is retained.
Starting point:
• The radiation beam axis is vertical
• No cassette inserted

▶ Swivel tube assembly.


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• The system collimates to 18 cm x 18 cm for the stored (last


used) SID.
▶ Insert cassette.
The system releases the exposure.
If the unit does not detect any size, the collimator will close. For
further information: Press “test” button.

4-12 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Automatic collimator 4.4

ID: 38950667
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.4.2 Selecting added filters
Philips recommends: that you use an added filter to reduce radiation
exposure, especially for X-ray exposures performed on children.
By repeatedly pressing this button you can select the added filters in the
following order:

0 mm Al
2 mm Al
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al

With APR (Anatomical Programmed Radiography) the system sets


0 AI
the programmed added filters automatically.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

(example)
ID: 38951691
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.4.3 SID display
When the radiation beam axis is vertical (lock-in) and patient table is
SID 115
selected, the SID is measured and displayed automatically.

A
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

(example)

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-13


4.4 Automatic collimator

If the radiation beam axis is horizontal and if vertical Bucky is selected,


two arrows on the display indicate that you must move the tube assembly
horizontally until the next valid lock-in.
After lock-in, the SID appears.
Syste m

SID 115

(example)

▶ If the radiation beam axis is oblique, or when using free cassette,


you have to use the tape measure.

▶ Pull out the tape measure parallel to the radiation beam axis as
far as the cassette center.
▶ Hold the tape measure for about 1 s and wait for the beep; the
SID is then stored and appears in the display field.
▶ Let go of the tape measure.
For an oblique beam exposure on the Bucky grid with cassette
size sensing, the radiation field is collimated to the inserted cas-
sette and displayed.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

With a free cassette, the radiation field is collimated to 18 cm x 18 cm


M SID ??
for the measured SID (no exposure beyond the cassette size occurs, as
18 cm x 24 cm is usually the smallest cassette size).

measure SID man.

(example)

4-14 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Automatic collimator 4.4

▶ If necessary, collimate to the required radiation field size. The


displayed size of the radiation field is valid for the displayed SID.
ID: 38952715
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.4.4 Collimating

NOTE Use the smallest possible collimation in order to avoid unnecessary radiation ex-
posure and to achieve the best image quality (due to lower radiation scatter).

With PBL

System
▶ Collimate manually. The light field indictor lights up.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

SID 115 16 x 20

(example)

If, when using the free cassette technique or with an oblique radiation beam axis,
you change the SID after manual collimation, you will have to measure it again.
The measurement is displayed.

CAUTION

Return to manual collimation after cassette change


▶ Press button
In automatic operation:
the last manual collimation is set.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Press again:
the nominal size of the cassette detected is set.
In the case of tomography, manual collimation is retained
even after cassette change if the cassette size stays the same
(size and position).

Please note:
At a SID of less than 97 cm the film size of 43 cm x 43 cm will not be

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-15


4.5 Operating the extended version

fully exposed. Ratio and f0 of the grid used also limit the usable SID
(chapter 7.12).
With manual operation
• you cannot select any APR program on the control grip,
• in tomography operation, the system checks whether all components
are in the correct start position (tube assembly in the center position,
SID and table height correct, collimator open, cassette inserted),
• the table unit and vertical Bucky are always ready for exposure – as
with a free cassette,
• tracking is not active.
ID: 38953739
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
4.5 Operating the extended version
ID: 38954763
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 14:38:59
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 14:38:59 4.5.1 Selecting auxiliary
You will also find the auxiliary buttons on the generator control desk.
Syste m

The LED of the button pressed is lit.

AT

se rvo stand b y*

(example)
AUX 1: Bucky in the table and tube assembly

AUX 2: Tomography unit


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

AUX 3: Tube assembly and vertical Bucky

AUX 4: Tube assembly and free cassette


Mode display always “M”.

Auxiliaries 5 … 8
If you wish to use more than four auxiliaries or work with the Movable
Cassette Stand (MCS) units:

4-16 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operating the extended version 4.5

You can set the combination of the tube assembly with four auxiliaries
on the control grip. Free cassette is not possible with automatic exposure
control.
A combination with MCS, including automatic exposure control, is
possible. For this you have to switch over to a separate auxiliary (5 ... 8)
on the generator. The collimator can still be operated.
You can recognize the possible combination with one of the auxiliaries
5 ... 8 on the control grip as follows:
• The LEDs for AUXs 5 ... 8 do not light up
• Symbol “Tube assembly selected” is lit
• Mode display: “M”
• APR cannot be selected
• Filter can be set
• SID can be measured
• Display for the radiation field: “???”

If you have selected one of the auxiliaries 1 ... 4 on the generator, you
can switch between these on the control grip. Auxiliaries 5 ... 8 can only
be selected on the generator control desk.
ID: 39266827
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02 4.5.2 Selecting APR program
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

For each auxiliary there are four APR programs available, which Cus-
tomer Service can set according to your requirements. You can call up
System

the APR programs one after the other by pressing repeatedly.


“=” indicates that the APR program applies to an exposure with grid.
You can select further APR programs on the generator control desk.
These appear on the display of the control grip too. You will find in-
formation in the Instructions for Use for the X-ray generator.

kidney ap =

(example)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Ready for exposure


The system is ready for exposure when
• all components are in the correct position,
• a cassette is inserted in the selected Bucky unit only,
• no Bucky unit contains a cassette in the case of free cassette,
• symbol “Tube assembly selected” is lit.
If the system is not ready for exposure you can call up a message by
pressing “test”. This message tells you why the system is not ready
for exposure or what you have to do.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-17


4.6 Moving the table top

You will find a list of all the possible messages in the appendix.

ID: 39267851
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
4.6 Moving the table top

Risk of trapping fingers!


Remove all persons and objects from the range of table top movement (gray).
Ensure that the patient is lying still and is not grasping the edges of the table top.
If necessary, use grips, straps etc.
WARNING

Table top downward movement stops if there is a collision. The oper-


ating point depends on the patient's weight. Upward movement is still
possible. You should move the ceiling suspension unit before the table
top collides with it during upward movement.
Move the table top horizontally
(“floating” table top)
▶ On the BuckyDiagnost TH2

▶ On BuckyDiagnost TF

Raise table top


Movement stops at the preferred working height (set during installa-
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

tion).
▶ Continue movement:
Press the footswitch or handswitch again.
The table has a protection switch to prevent overloading. If you
continuously raise and lower the table top for over 3 minutes,
power will be cut off. Then you will have to wait another 20
minutes.

4-18 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 4.7

Lower table top


The table top stops at the preferred working height.
▶ Continue movement:
Press the footswitch or handswitch again.

▶ Disable footswitch
The button is lit.

▶ Enable footswitch again:


press button again.

ID: 39268875
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
4.7 Moving BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4
Raise/lower Bucky unit

4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-19


4.8 Moving BuckyDiagnost VS

Tilt Bucky unit (VT)


▶ Remove stretch grip

▶ Read the tilt angle off the scale

▶ Set stop, if necessary

ID: 39269899
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
4.8 Moving BuckyDiagnost VS
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep08207


Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02

ID: 39270923
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02 4.8.1 Movements

Risk of trapping fingers!


Remove all persons and objects from the range of device movement.

WARNING

4-20 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving BuckyDiagnost VS 4.8

When BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package) is combined with mo-


torized vertical drive the Bucky unit is equipped with a collision guard.
This means that movement stops when the Bucky unit runs into an
obstacle.
ID: 39271947
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02 4.8.2 Raising/lowering Bucky unit
Electric
Raise slowly

Raise quickly
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Lower slowly
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-21


4.8 Moving BuckyDiagnost VS

Lower quickly

Manual
Raise/lower Bucky unit

ID: 39272971
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02 4.8.3 Tilting Bucky unit

Remove the stretch grip, if necessary, so as not to inhibit tilting.

CAUTION

Into the horizontal position

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-22 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving BuckyDiagnost VS 4.8

Into the vertical position (90°)


Continue movement: press button again.

ID: 39273995
Created by: dep08207
Created: 21.02.2006 18:24:02
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:24:02 4.8.4 Moving Bucky unit into the factory-set default position

NOTE You must always press the button for the 2nd function first

▶ Bucky unit rises,


e.g. for thorax exposures.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• Press “Raise/lower (manual)” button

▶ Bucky unit raises and tilts to -20°,


e.g. for skull exposures.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• Press “Raise/lower (manual)” button

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-23


4.8 Moving BuckyDiagnost VS

▶ Move Bucky unit


• from the vertical position into the horizontal position or
• tilt from -20° to 0°.
Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• Press “Raise/lower (manual)” button

▶ Bucky unit lowers,


e.g. for foot exposures.

Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• Press “Raise/lower (manual)” button

▶ Bucky unit lowers and tilts into the horizontal position,


e.g. for exposures of the extremities.

Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• Press “Raise/lower (manual)” button

▶ Move Bucky unit


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• from the horizontal position into the vertical position or


• tilt from 0° to -20°.
The height remains the same.
Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• Press “Raise/lower (manual)” button

4-24 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Moving BuckyDiagnost VS 4.8

ID: 41548811
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.8.5 Positioning patient
Example: Thorax pa
▶ Select APR program or set exposure parameters or exposure via
workstation

▶ Clean the chin rest and front panel.


▶ Position the patient in front of the Bucky unit; to make posi-
tioning the patient more comfortable, the patient should use the
grips.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Move the Bucky unit to the required height.


▶ Select measuring fields or measuring field group.
▶ Set the source-image distance (SID).
▶ Align X-ray tube assembly to the Bucky unit using the light field
and, if necessary, the laser (no need for this with tracking).
▶ If the cassette is inserted centrally or with centered collima-
tion to the detector: move the tube assembly vertically until the
laser points to the middle.
If the cassette is inserted off-center or with off-center collima-
tion to the detector:
Example: cassette (35 cm portrait) at the top edge of the cassette
tray.
Move the tube assembly vertically until the laser points to the top
center mark.

▶ Collimate
With automatic size sensing you can still change the exposed area
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

within the beam limitation. With off-center setting without


tracking you must adjust the height of the tube assembly.

The measuring fields must lie inside the collimated field.


If not: change or switch off measuring fields

CAUTION

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-25


4.9 Changing manual cassette tray

ID: 41549835
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.9 Changing manual cassette tray
ID: 41550859
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.9.1 Preconditions
• Manual interchangeable grid
• No cassette size sensing

An exposure is released if
• the cassette plate is fully pushed in and
• either there is no grid or
• the grid in place is in the start position.

You can insert the cassette off-center as well for


• cassette size sensing
• tracking
ID: 41551883
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.9.2 At the table

Risk of trapping fingers between cassette and cassette tray!

WARNING

Inserting a cassette
▶ Pull lever and pull out the cassette plate until it slots into the
loading position.

▶ Insert cassette straight (at stop top and bottom)

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-26 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Changing manual cassette tray 4.9

▶ LED lights up if
• cassette is correctly inserted and
• size was detected 1

▶ Pull lever and push in the cassette plate fully. If the size was not
detected or the cassette was incorrectly inserted, a brief beeping
is heard after the cassette plate is pushed in. 1
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ With manual systems all Bucky functions are internally tested.


An exposure is only released if all conditions have been met. In
the case of grid problems you can continue working without a
grid if necessary.

1
Cassette size sensing (optional) After insertion of the cassette tray the
unit detects the size of the inserted cassette.

Risk of trapping fingers between cassette and cassette tray!

WARNING
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-27


4.9 Changing manual cassette tray

▶ Pull lever and pull out the cassette plate until it slots into the
loading position.

▶ Pull lever and push in the cassette plate fully.

ID: 41552907
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.9.3 On the BuckyDiagnost VS with Bucky unit

Risk of trapping fingers between the cassette and cassette tray.

WARNING
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-28 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Changing manual cassette tray 4.9

Inserting a cassette
▶ Pull lever and pull out the cassette plate until it slots into the
loading position.

▶ Insert cassette straight (at stop top and bottom)


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ LED lights up if
• cassette is correctly inserted and
• size was detected 1
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-29


4.9 Changing manual cassette tray

▶ Pull lever and push in the cassette plate fully. If the size was not
detected or the cassette was incorrectly inserted, a brief beeping
is heard after the cassette plate is pushed in. 1

▶ With manual systems all Bucky functions are internally tested.


An exposure is only released if all conditions have been met. In
the case of grid problems you can continue working without a
grid if necessary.

1
Cassette size sensing (optional)
After insertion of the cassette tray the unit detects the size of the inserted
cassette.

Risk of trapping fingers between the cassette and cassette tray.

WARNING

Removing a cassette
▶ Pull lever and pull out the cassette plate until it slots into the
loading position.

▶ Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-30 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Automatic cassette tray ACL4 4.10

▶ Pull lever and push in the cassette plate fully.…

ID: 41553931
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.10 Automatic cassette tray ACL4
ID: 41554955
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Changed by: dep08207


Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.10.1 Risk of tripping fingers

With the ACL4, there is a risk of trapping fingers between the front panel and
Bucky.

WARNING
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

ID: 41555979
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.10.2 The reset function
The ACL4 always carries out a self-test and stops automatically to pre-
vent damage if an error is detected. This may mean that you are not able
to remove an exposed cassette. In this case you can reactivate the ACL4
with “Reset” and then remove the cassette.
If there is a mechanical blockage, “Reset” has no effect. You must inform
Customer Service.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-31


4.10 Automatic cassette tray ACL4

▶ For “Reset”, press both buttons simultaneously.

ID: 41557003
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.10.3 Changing the cassette
At the table
▶ Inserting a cassette
Insert cassette fully into the cassette carriage, then let go of it.

▶ Removing a cassette
Remove the exposed cassette or else there will be no system enable
for the next exposure. If programmed, the cassette carriage will
move to the loading position for approx. 15 s after exposure so
that you can conveniently remove the cassette. Then the cassette
carriage moves to the exposure position again.

On the vertical Bucky


▶ Inserting a cassette
Insert cassette fully into the cassette carriage, then let go of it.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Cassette “top off-center”


For thorax exposures, you can insert the cassette off-center at the top:
▶ When the cassette carriage is out, select cassette position “top off-
center”.

▶ Insert cassette.

4-32 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Changing grids on the ACL4 4.11

Philips makes the following recommendation for exposures


with tilted Bucky unit at angles between 0° and -20°:
Insert the cassette at 0° before tilting the Bucky unit.
If you nevertheless wish to insert the cassette with the Bucky unit
tilted, please observe the following:
Insert the cassette into the cassette carriage just far enough so that
its front edge is held by the cassette carriage. Otherwise the cas-
sette may drop onto the measuring chamber.

▶ Removing a cassette
Press button

▶ Remove the exposed cassette or else there will be no system enable


for the next exposure.
To allow the patient to use the side and rear grips comfortably,
the cassette carriage only moves into the unloading position upon
request after exposure.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 41558027
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.11 Changing grids on the ACL4
ID: 41559051
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.11.1 At the table

▪ Never leave any objects on the measuring chamber because they would be
exposed on film.
▪ Protect the grids against damage. Even if you can insert a damaged grid, it
cannot be used because bent shutters do not focus properly.
CAUTION

▶ Close the cassette carriage, if necessary.


▶ 1. Push the table top back
2. Open flap
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-33


4.11 Changing grids on the ACL4

▶ Pull out the grid horizontally without tilting it

▶ Push in the grid horizontally without tilting it until the unlock


lever engages;
for exposures without grid, close the flap directly (fig. 6)

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-34 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Changing grids on the ACL4 4.11

ID: 41560075
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.11.2 On the vertical Bucky
1 2

3
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Fig. Inserting a grid


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-35


4.11 Changing grids on the ACL4

1 2

Fig. Removing a grid

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-36 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Changing grids on the ACL4 4.11

ID: 41561099
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.11.3 On the BuckyDiagnost VS
Inserting a grid
▶ Press button, if the yellow LED is not lit

▶ Push the grid fully into the slit


• The grid automatically moves into the start position.
• The yellow LED flashes first and then lights up steadily.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Removing a grid

Risk of trapping fingers between grid and lever! When you press the lever, the grid
pops out quickly.

WARNING

▶ Press button

▶ Press lever down


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

(in the “right-hand” version the lever is on top)

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-37


4.12 Operation of tracking

▶ Remove grid
▶ Insert new grid or
press button again.
If you do not press the button again, the grid carriage moves into
the start position after approx. 20 s.
ID: 41562123
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.11.4 Storing / removing grids
(only with the advanced package)
You can store two grids behind the flap in the Bucky unit.
▶ Open flap: press briefly

▶ Insert / remove grid

▶ Close flap

ID: 41563147
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.12 Operation of tracking
ID: 41564171
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.12.1 Tracking for the SID
Activating tracking
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

If you select the auxiliary on the generator control desk, the tube assembly and
column may begin to move. Observe the position of the patient and ensure un-
obstructed paths for the tube assembly and column.

WARNING

1. Select auxiliary on the control grip or on the generator control desk.


2. Press the button for the selected auxiliary again.
˗ “Servo active” appears.

4-38 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of tracking 4.12

˗ If the tube assembly was not in the exposure position, it will move
to that position.
˗ If tracking cannot be switched on, an appropriate message ap-
pears. You will find a list of all the possible messages in the
appendix.

Switching on the tracking function


You switch on the tracking function by pressing one of the four buttons
for the auxiliaries twice. The following appears
• “Servo active” or
• “Servo standby” and
• “AT”.

For tomography, the tracking is adapted to tomography conditions.


“Servo active”:
• If the tube assembly is in the capture range, it moves to the exposure
position.
• The tube assembly follows any adjustment to Bucky height.

“Servo standby”:
Move the tube assembly into the capture range. You have reached it
when “Servo active” appears.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Switching off tracking


You can only switch off tracking when “Servo active” is displayed.
Press the button for the auxiliary selected. “Servo off” appears
or
raise or lower the tube assembly manually until “Servo active” appears.
The tracking function is automatically deactivated if you do any of the
following during tracking
• swivel the tube assembly,
• interrupt the movement of the tube assembly,
• release the central brake,
• release the brake for “Raise/lower tube assembly” or
• rotate the tube assembly round the horizontal axis.
ID: 41565195
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.12.2 Tracking for the image receptor
The carriage moves once with the center of the image receptor under
the radiation beam axis.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

If the tube assembly is not positioned above the center of the table the
carriage moves as far as possible under the radiation beam axis. The
collimators automatically close to an extent that it is impossible to ex-
pose beyond the film. If the tube assembly is positioned too far from
the center of the image receptor, the collimator closes completely and
is no longer ready for exposure.
After pressing the “test” button, “Move CS over Bucky tray” appears.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-39


4.13 Tomography (optional)

The system is only enabled when in an idle state. If the image receptor
meets an obstacle it comes to a standstill and “Maybe collision with
Bucky tray” appears.
ID: 41566219
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.12.3 Changing auxiliaries
When tracking is switched on you can change the auxiliary. Tracking
remains switched on.
ID: 41567243
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.13 Tomography (optional)
Servo assist
In systems with tomography the following movements are servo-assisted
to make operation more convenient:
• longitudinal movement of the tube assembly
• swivel movement of the tube assembly
• all movements of the Bucky carriage.

Servo assist for movements away from the center position can be set by
Customer Service.

NOTE If you apply force during operation, the lock-in positions for the tube assembly
swivel movement may change. If this happens, swivel the tube assembly to the 0°
position and lock it in place. The lock-in position will then be correct again.

Philips recommends you to:


Only switch the system off when all the movements are in lock-in po-
sitions.
It is then easier for the system to start up again.
With tracking
▶ Select AUX tomography unit.
With tracking switched on, the tube assembly moves to the to-
mographic height.
Without tracking:
• Set the Tomo-SID
• Move the ceiling suspension unit to the center position lon-
gitudinally and transversely (column is locked-in when the
corresponding LED is lit)

▶ Set the tube assembly to 0° in all directions.


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Insert cassette.
▶ Position patient;
the measuring chamber label on the Bucky indicates the head and
feet ends.
▶ Move table top to the tomographic height.
▶ Collimate
When the cassette is changed, the collimation is retained if a new

4-40 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Tomography (optional) 4.13

cassette of the same size and orientation is used. Otherwise the


system automatically collimates to the new cassette.
• Use the last manual collimation: press “Memory” button.
System
▶ Select APR program,
if necessary, select a tomography program. You can call up the
APR programs one after the other by pressing repeatedly.

SID 115 18 x 24

AT 0 Al

kidney

12.0 8 1s

(example)
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

System
▶ Set the tomographic height.

12.0
(example)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Test run
With a test run you can check your settings and prepare the patient for
the movement of the unit.
Before you start the test run:

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-41


4.14 Releasing an exposure

Remove all obstacles from the range of movement of the ceiling suspension unit
and the Bucky and ensure that the patient is lying safely.

CAUTION

▷ When “Ready for exposure” lights up:


▶ Start test run.
If you cannot start a test run, the conditions not fulfilled will
appear on the display. You will find a list of all the possible mes-
sages in the appendix.

▶ If necessary, change exposure data on the generator control desk.


If necessary, abort the test run:
• release the table top brake
or
• raise/lower the table top
or
• pull out the cassette tray
or
• move out the cassette carriage.
ID: 41568267
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.14 Releasing an exposure
▶ If the Ready lamp is not lit on the generator control desk, you
can press the “test” button to call up a help text on the control
grip display (only on the extended version).
Keep the exposure button pressed until the end of the tomo-
graphic exposure (dead man’s principle); if you do not, tomo-
graphic movement stops and radiation will be switched off.

ID: 41569291
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.15 In the event of an error
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep08207


Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48

you can continue working with restrictions.


The key-operated switch
With this, you switch the system over to manual operation.
Then
• you can also use cassettes of non-standard size,
• you can position cassettes off-center in the table,…
• you do not have to bring the patient to another casualty workstation.

4-42 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II 4.16

The automatic collimator “NICOL”


• A defective collimator control does not cause a failure as long as the
light field indicator is operative.
• If the light field indicator fails, you can continue positioning – as
with manual collimation. In this way you determine the image center
by means of the central laser. The size of the radiation field appears
in the display field.
• If the display does not work you can control the size of the radiation
field via the light field of the collimator.

ID: 41570315
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.16 Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
ID: 41571339
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.16.1 Cassette holder

NOTE The tube arm is only exactly counterbalanced if the cassette holder (24 cm x 30
cm) with inserted cassette and fixed grid is mounted. If you swivel the tube arm
without cassette holder, movement may be uncontrolled.

▪ Only swivel the tube arm with the cassette holder mounted and the cassette
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

and fixed grid inserted. Guide the tube arm with one hand to control move-
ment.

WARNING
▪ Only use normal cassettes without lead lining. Lead linings cause the meas-
uring chamber to shut down incorrectly.

Taking off cassette holder

Putting on cassette holder

Tilting cassette holder


▶ Pull knob
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Lock must engage

Moving measuring chamber into the radiation beam

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-43


4.16 Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II

Do not forget to move the measuring chamber into the radiation beam for ex-
posures with automatic exposure control.

CAUTION

Rotating cassette holder

Inserting cassette or grid

Removing cassette or grid


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-44 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II 4.16

ID: 41572363
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.16.2 Moving unit
▶ Moving unit transversely

▶ Moving unit longitudinally


bucky DIAGNOST

0 30
30
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Rotating unit round the stand axis


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-45


4.16 Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II

▶ Raising/lowering unit

▶ Rotating tube assembly round the horizontal axis


The scale indicates the angle.

▶ Moving unit freely


• longitudinally and
• transversely and
• vertically

Swivelling unit round the horizonatal axis


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

NOTE The tube arm is only exactly counterbalanced if the cassette holder (24 cm x 30
cm) with inserted cassette and fixed grid is mounted. If you swivel the tube arm
without cassette holder, movement may be uncontrolled.

Risk of collision in rooms with low ceilings (less than 3 m)! If the tube arm is
pointing upwards and the tube assembly arm is in its highest position there is a
risk of collision with the ceiling suspension unit cover.

CAUTION

4-46 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II 4.16

▶ Rotating collimator
bucky DIAGNOST

0 30
30
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 41573387
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.16.3 When you are working on the BuckyDiagnost TH or the
BuckyDiagnost VE/VT/VS
• Avoid collisions when moving the tube arm.
• Move the tube arm with cassette holder out of the radiation beam.
• Point the tube assembly at the image receptor.
ID: 41574411
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.16.4 Preferred working positions
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Fig. 4.9 Thorax exposures

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-47


4.16 Operation of BuckyDiagnost Trauma II

Fig. 4.10 Exposures on the table

Fig. 4.11 Knee exposures

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Fig. 4.12 Lateral exposures

4-48 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of TRAUMOB X 4.17

ID: 41575435
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
4.17 Operation of TRAUMOB X
ID: 41576459
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.17.1 Abort patient positioning

Please bear the following in mind when positioning the patient: When transfering
from/to and getting onto/off the table, the TRAUMOB X must be standing firmly
on a level floor on all four castors. The castors must be locked.

DANGER

• Patients who are unable to walk


˗ Before transfering the patient, move the TRAUMOB X alongside
the table or bed, leaving no gap between the table tops or table
and bed.
˗ Lock the castors.
˗ When transfering the patient, push the TRAUMOB X against
the table top or bed.
• Patients who are able to walk
˗ Lock the castors before the patient gets onto/off the
TRAUMOB X.
˗ Lower the table top to a comfortable sitting height for the patient.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 41577483
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.17.2 Inserting table top
Insert the table top into the metal brackets at the head and feet ends
with the smooth surface facing upward.
ID: 41578507
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.17.3 Moving unit

Do not move the trolley with the patient on it if the red warning sign is visible.

DANGER

The trolley is equipped with offset castors for better maneuvrability.


Please note that there is an increased risk of the trolley toppling over on
uneven surfaces.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

YES

YES

NO

NO

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-49


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

ID: 41579531
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.17.4 How the brake works
At this pedal setting the trolley will move freely.

At this setting one of the castors is locked to move “straight ahead”.

The castors are locked.

ID: 41580555
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 18:33:48
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 18:33:48 4.17.5 Raising/lowering the table top

Make sure that the table top does not drop suddenly when the patient is lying on
it and you disengage the lock. The patient’s weight is only partly counterbal-
anced.

DANGER

ID: 42008587
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80
ID: 42009611
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
Changed by: dep08207
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed: 22.02.2006 19:29:32 4.18.1 Operation of all configurations


Switching the generator on/off
Switching on

The generator performs a self-test:


• All the lamps and display segments light up briefly.
• There is an audible signal.

4-50 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

During the test you should check the following:


• Do all the lamps and display segments light up?
• Is there an audible signal?

If there is a fault please call Customer Service. If an error message ap-


pears, you will find help in the appendix.
After the self-test the generator assumes the state as it was before the
equipment was last switched off.

Before switching off the generator: Wait for 1 min after an exposure or after
pressing the preparation button so that the rotating anode can decelerate.
Only in an emergency should you switch it off immediately.

CAUTION

Switching off
The generator and all auxiliaries connected will be switched off.
Setting display brightness
Press the buttons in the order indicated in the description below and
keep them pressed for as long as you wish to change the brightness.
To set the display
• of the exposure data panel,
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• of the APR indicator not selected and


• possibly of the fluoroscopy indicator:

mAs mA With “minus” brightness is reduced and with “plus” it increases.


Reset and or

To set the display


• of the APR program selected (highlighted):

kV With “minus” brightness is reduced and with “plus” it increases.


Reset and
ID: 42010635
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 19:29:32 4.18.2 Operation of the basic configuration
Exposure techniques
The following exposure techniques are available:
• kV-mAs technique
• kV-mA-s technique
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

The table below shows you how to switch between the individual tech-
niques:

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-51


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

Initial state Switch over to

Making X-ray exposures


▶ Select auxiliary The corresponding LED lights up.

▶ Select focus;
The medium focus is only available with Variofocus (optional).
The corresponding LED lights up.

▶ Enter exposure data


Example:
70 kV 25 mAs 50 ms

– + – + – +
▶ If necessary, adapt exposure data to the patient’s body.
Depending on programming by Customer Service kV and mAs
are adapted in dose-equivalent increments for each auxiliary.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare tube assembly (stage 1)
The symbol “Ready for exposure” goes out briefly.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Release exposure (stage 2)


Hold down button until you hear the audible signal. If you release

4-52 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

before the signal sounds you abort the exposure. Do not press the
button more than three times a minute; this increases the life of
the X-ray tube.
You can press the button straight through to the second position.
After the preparation time the exposure is released.
The radiation symbol is lit; preparation/exposure can also be in-
dicated visually (optional).

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out
• the exposure data remain intact.
ID: 42011659
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 19:29:32 4.18.3 Operation with AEC, without APR
Exposure techniques
The following exposure techniques are available:
• kV technique
• kV-mAs technique
• kV-mA-s technique
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

The table below shows you how to switch between the individual tech-
niques:
Initial state Switch over to

kV kV-mAs kV-mA-s
kV
mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC

*
kV-mAs
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC

kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

AEC AEC AEC AEC

* Display exposure parameters: press button again.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-53


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

Making X-ray exposures


▶ Select auxiliary
The corresponding LED lights up.

▶ Select focus;
The medium focus is only available with Variofocus (optional).
The corresponding LED lights up.

▶ Select measuring field


• The LEDs of the selected measuring fields light up.
• If you switch off all the measuring fields, the “AEC” button
goes out.
▶ Enter exposure data
Example:
70 kV 25 mAs 50 ms

– + – + – +
▶ If necessary, adapt exposure data to the patient’s body
Depending on programming by Customer Service the following
are adapted for each individual auxiliary:
• kV and mAs in dose-equivalent increments
• density in increments of 6%, 12% or 25%.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release – see steps 7 and 8 (chapter
4.18.2).

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• the radiation symbol goes out


• the exposure data remain intact
• post-exposure display appears for 25 s.

▶ To call up the post-exposure display again:


press this

4-54 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

ID: 42012683
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 19:29:32 4.18.4 Operation with APR, without AEC
Exposure techniques
The following exposure techniques are available:
• kV-mAs technique
• kV-mAs-s technique
• kV-mA-s technique

The table below shows you how to switch between the individual tech-
niques. During installation the kV-mAs technique and the kV-mAs-s
technique can be alternatively programmed.
Initial state Switch over to

kV-mAs or kV-mA-s
kV-mAs-s*
kV-mAs or
kV-mAs-s*
mA-s mA-s mA-s
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

AEC AEC

kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC

* Depending on programming by Customer Service


ID: 42013707
Created by: dep08207
Created: 22.02.2006 19:29:32
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 22.02.2006 19:29:32 4.18.5 APR records
Lists and groups
During installation the generator is equipped with APR records from a
library.
• You can select a program from a list of APR programs
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

or
• You can select a program from a group of APR programs.
Groups are APR programs collected according to regions of the body,
which then appear on the display under the generic term, the name
of the group.

In addition you can change the exposure data of the program selected.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-55


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

Selecting a program from a group of programs (if saved)


Example:
SKULL SPINE Skull ap/p a Skull lat

CHEST ABDOMEN Skull halfaxia l Skull axia l

U EXTREMITIE
S PELVIS/HIP Sella lat Sinuse s

L EXTREMITIE
S Tem p oral b one s Menu e

Fig. 4.15 The left-hand illustration shows the regions of the body.

If, as highlighted, you select “Skull”, the display of APR programs ap-
pears, as shown in the right-hand illustration.
▶ Select auxiliary
• The corresponding LED lights up.
• The last APR setting selected appears.

Men u ▶ Press this


The groups assigned to that auxiliary appear
▶ Select group
• The names of the APR programs assigned appear.
• lights up if there are more programs than can be shown
in the display.
With this button you can switch between pages.
▶ Select APR program
The name of the program is highlighted and the corresponding
exposure data appear.
If you do not select any APR program after selecting a group, the
name of the last program selected is highlighted after pressing
the exposure switch; the appropriate exposure data remain intact.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release – see the last two steps chapter
4.18.2).

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out
• the exposure data remain intact.

You can call up the name of the group again under “Menu”:

4-56 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

Selecting a program from a list of APR programs


Customer Service can enter APR programs according to your require-
ments. The local guidelines must be observed. If there are any deviations
herefrom, reasons must be given in writing. Other APR programs can
be filed under the buttons of an assigned module.
Example:
Skull ap/p a Skull lat Ab domen a p Ab domen l at

Skull halfaxia l Cervical Spin e Hip ap Hip med-l at

Tho rac Spine a p Tho rac Spine l at Shoulder a p Sternum l at

Lumbar Spine a p Lumbar Spine l at Kidn ey Gallbladde r

▶ Select auxiliary
• The corresponding LED lights up.
• The page with the last program called up is displayed and the
name of the program is highlighted.
• lights up if there are more programs than can be shown
in the display. After the last page the first page displayed re-
appears.
▶ Select APR program
The name of the program is highlighted and the corresponding
exposure data appear.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release - see the last two steps in chapter
4.18.2).

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out
• the exposure data remain intact.

Overriding exposure data of an APR program


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Please observe the chapter “Radiation protection”on page 2-4. Reasons


for deviations from the local guidelines must be given in writing.
You can override the following exposure data:
Focus
Select focus;
The medium focus is only available with Variofocus (optional).
The corresponding LED lights up.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-57


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

Measuring field
Select measuring field
• The LEDs of the selected measuring fields light up.
• If you switch off all the measuring fields, the “AEC” button goes out.
Switch AEC back on again: select measuring field.
Exposure voltage
70 kV Use the buttons to change the exposure voltage.
– +

Density correction
0 Only possible with automatic exposure control.
Use the buttons to change the density.
– +

mAs value
25 mAs Use the buttons to change the mAs value.
– +

Exposure current
25 mA Use the buttons to change the exposure current.
– +

Screen film combination


G200ST Only possible with automatic exposure control.
Use the buttons to change the screen film combination - max. 5 FSC
– +
per auxiliary (see chapter 9.5).
Exposure time
50 ms Use the buttons to change the exposure time.
Not possible with
– +
• tomography auxiliaries with automatic tomographic time input,
• kV-mAs technique.
If you have changed the data of a program, an asterisk appears after the
name of the program. Please observe the instructions for the monitoring
system (see chapter 3.2.15).
Example:
Rectum*
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

The overridden data remain intact - even if you change e.g. the
auxiliary - until you select the same program again or a different
one.
Saving overridden data
Press “Reset” and the button for the required APR program in this order
and hold them down for longer than 2 s.
The asterisk disappears and the changed data are saved.
If required, Customer Service can prevent the possibility of saving data
which have been changed.

4-58 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

ID: 43290123
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.18.6 Operation with AEC and APR
Exposure techniques
The following exposure techniques are available:
• kV technique
• kV-mA technique
• kV-mAs technique
• kV-mAs-s technique
• kV-mA-s technique

The following table shows you how to switch between the individual
techniques:
Initial state Switch over to

kV or kV-mAs or kV-mA-s
kV-mA kV-mAs-s*
kV or
kV-mA
mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC AEC


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

kV-mAs or
kV-mAs-s*
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC

kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC

* During installation the kV-mAs and kV-mAs-s techniques can be al-


ternatively programmed.
Lists and groups
During installation the generator is equipped with APR records from a
library.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• You can select a program from a list of APR programs

or
• you can select a program from a group of APR programs. Groups
are APR programs collected according to regions of the body, which
then appear on the display under the generic term, the name of the
group.

In addition you can change the exposure data of the program selected.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-59


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

Selecting a program from a group of programs (if saved)


Example:
SKULL SPINE Skull ap/p a Skull lat

CHEST ABDOMEN Skull halfaxia l Skull axia l

U EXTREMITIE
S PELVIS/HIP Sella lat Sinuse s

L EXTREMITIE
S Tem p oral b one s Menu e

Fig. 4.19 The left-hand illustration shows the regions of the body.

If, as highlighted, you select “Skull”, the display of APR programs ap-
pears, as shown in the right-hand illustration.
▶ Select auxiliary
• The corresponding LED lights up.
• The last APR setting selected appears.

Men u ▶ Press this


The groups assigned to that auxiliary appear
▶ Select group.
• The names of the APR programs assigned appear.
• lights up if there are more programs than can be shown
in the display.
With this button you can switch between pages.
▶ Select APR program
The name of the program is highlighted and the corresponding
exposure data appear.
If you do not select any APR program after selecting a group, the
name of the last program selected is highlighted after pressing
the exposure switch; the appropriate exposure data remain intact.
▶ If necessary, adapt exposure data to the patient’s body
Depending on programming by Customer Service the following
are adapted for each individual auxiliary:
• kV and mAs in dose-equivalent increments
• density in increments of 6%, 12% or 25%.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release – see the last two steps in chapter
4.18.2.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out

4-60 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

• in the case of exposures without automatic exposure control the ex-


posure data remain intact.
• in the case of exposures with automatic exposure control the post-
exposure display remains for 25 s.

To call up the post-exposure display again:


Press this

You can call up the name of the group again under “Menu”.
You can repeat the exposure using the same exposure data but
without automatic exposure control:
▶ Switch off AEC
If, after 25 s the post-exposure display disappears to level 2, you
must first call up the post-exposure display of the last exposure
and then switch AEC off.
▶ Call up post-exposure display of the last exposure

▶ Position patient if necessary


▶ Collimate, if necessary!
▶ Prepare exposure and release – see the last two steps in chapter
4.18.2.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Selecting a program from a list of APR programs


Customer Service can enter APR programs according to your require-
ments. The local guidelines must be observed. If there are any deviations
herefrom, reasons must be given in writing. Other APR programs can
be filed under the buttons of an assigned module.
Example:
Skull ap/p a Skull lat Ab domen a p Ab domen l at

Skull halfaxia l Cervical Spin e Hip ap Hip med-l at

Tho rac Spine a p Tho rac Spine l at Shoulder a p Sternum l at

Lumbar Spine a p Lumbar Spine l at Kidn ey Gallbladde r


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-61


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

▶ Select auxiliary
• The corresponding LED lights up.
• The page with the last program called up is displayed and the
name of the program is highlighted.
• lights up if there are more programs than can be shown
in the display.
With this button you can switch between pages. After the last
page the first page displayed reappears.
▶ Select APR program
The name of the program is highlighted and the corresponding
exposure data appear.
With the APR program you do not automatically select the ap-
propriate auxiliary.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release – see the last two steps in chapter
4.18.2.

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out
• in the case of exposures without automatic exposure control the ex-
posure data remain intact.
• in the case of exposures with automatic exposure control the post-
exposure display remains for 25 s.

To call up the post-exposure display again:


Press this

You can repeat the exposure using the same exposure data but
without automatic exposure control:
Switch off AEC
The exposure data last used appear.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Selecting exposure current for kV-mA technique


With the kV-mA technique you can select the exposure current for the
next exposure. You can also program it as the default according to your
applicational requirements, e.g. to extend the exposure time for making
an exposure of the odontoid process of the axis.
For the kV-mA technique you set the exposure current
• in the kV-mA-s technique direct or
• indirectly in the kV-mAs-s technique

4-62 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

Please adhere to the sequence of steps.

NOTE If you wish to save the overridden data, you must select the exposure time before
saving so that the mAs product assumes an anatomical value.

▷ a. Setting via the kV-mA-s technique


▶ Switch off AEC
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique; if the gener-
ator is programmed to the kV-mAs-s technique, continue as
described under b.
▶ Set exposure current
If, for example, you reduce exposure current, the exposure time
is correspondingly longer with the kV-mA technique.
▶ Switch on AEC
This defines the last exposure current set for the next expo-
sure; automatic exposure control regulates exposure time accord-
ingly.
If required you can save these data (see chapter 4.18.5).
▶ Set exposure time

▷ b. Setting via the kV-mAs-s technique


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Switch off AEC


The generator switches to the kV-mAs-s technique.
▶ Set anatomical mAs
Exposure current is set automatically via mAs *
▶ Set anatomical exposure time

▶ Switch on AEC
This defines the last exposure current set for the next expo-
sure; automatic exposure control regulates exposure time accord-
ingly.
If required you can save these data (see chapter 4.18.5).
* If you wish to change the exposure current directly:

▶ Switch on mA-s
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique.
Proceed as described in a, 2nd step.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

ID: 43291147
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.18.7 Tomography
Making tomographic exposures without automatic exposure con-
trol (TDC)
▶ Select tomography
If units are equipped with a remote selection feature, the gener-
ator switches over automatically to tomography if you select this
mode on the unit.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-63


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

• The LED lights up.


• kV-mA-s or kV-mAs-s technique is activated.
• lights up if there are more programs than can be shown
in the display.
With this button you can switch between pages. After the last
page the first page displayed reappears.
▶ Select APR program
The name of the program is highlighted.
▶ Prepare auxiliary for tomography.
▶ On the auxiliary select a tomo trajectory which matches the APR
program selected.
▶ Set exposure time
Exposure time and tomographic time must agree.
If necessary, match exposure time to tomographic time.
▶ Select mAs or mA - depending on the programming
• After selecting a tomo trajectory the respective exposure time
will be automatically set on the generator if
- the generator is equipped with “Automatic tomographic
time input” (optional) and
- a suitable tomography unit is connected up.
• The symbol “Ready for exposure” lights up.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release - see the last two steps in chapter
4.18.2.

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out.

Tomographic exposures with automatic exposure control (TDC)


Via the option “Automatic tomographic time input” the unit transmits
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

the specified exposure time to the generator. You cannot override it.
If you have selected tomography, the following table shows you how to
switch between the individual techniques:

4-64 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

Initial state Switch over to

TDC kV-mAs-s kV-mA-s


TDC
mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC AEC

kV-mAs-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s

AEC AEC AEC AEC

Making tomographic exposures with automatic exposure control


(TDC)
▶ Select tomography
If units are equipped with a remote selection feature, the gener-
ator switches over automatically to tomography if you select this
mode on the unit.
• The LED lights up.
• kV-mA-s or kV-mAs-s technique is activated.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• lights up if there are more programs than can be shown


in the display.
With this button you can switch between pages. After the last
page the first page displayed reappears.
▶ Select APR program
The name of the program is highlighted.
Prepare auxiliary for tomography (see Instructions for Use for the
auxiliary).

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-65


4.18 Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80

▶ If necessary, adapt exposure data to the patient's body


Depending on programming by Customer Service the following
are adapted for each individual auxiliary:
• kV and mAs in dose-equivalent increments
• density in increments of 6%, 12% or 25%.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare exposure and release - see the last two steps in chapter
4.18.2.

After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out.

If there has been an incorrect exposure, see next paragraph.


Selecting initial current for TDC
If there has been an incorrect exposure, you must correct the initial
current. This can also be performed for existing programs if the appli-
cation requires.
You can set the initial current for TDC
• in the kV-mA-s technique direct or
• indirectly in the kV-mAs-s technique

Please adhere to the sequence of steps.


a. Setting via the kV-mA-s technique
▶ Switch off AEC
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique; if the gener-
ator is programmed to the kV-mAs-s technique, proceed as
described in b.
▶ Set initial current

▶ Switch on AEC
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

This defines the initial current last set for the next exposure.
If required you can save these data (see chapter 4.18.5).
▶ Set exposure time

b. Setting via the kV-mAs-s technique

4-66 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 4.18

▶ Switch off AEC


The generator switches to the kV-mAs-s technique.
▶ Set anatomical mAs
Initial current is set automatically via mAs.*
▶ Switch on AEC
This indirectly defines the initial current for the next expo-
sure.
If required you can save these data (see chapter 4.18.5).
* If you wish to change the initial current directly:

▶ Switch on mAs
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique.
Proceed as described in a, 2nd step.
ID: 43292171
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.18.8 Dose display (optional, depends on system)
This appears only if an auxiliary with size sensing has been selected. The
computer totals and stores the area dose products of all the exposures.
If you switch examination rooms with the auxiliary, this total remains
intact and is available when you select the examination room again. The
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

values are lost if you press power on or off.


▶ Select auxiliary
The LED lights up.

▶ Call up level 3
The total of area dose products [cGycm2] of all exposures for the
current patient in the room selected appears.
▶ Delete dose display per tube.
The dose display is also deleted if
• the PDO (optional, see separate Instructions for Use) reports:
“End of Examination”.
• the DigitalDiagnost system reports: “End of Examination”.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-67


4.19 Operation of the patient data printer Optimus PDO

ID: 43293195
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
4.19 Operation of the patient data printer Optimus
PDO
ID: 43294219
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.1 Activating the output device
▶ Select output medium:
• printer 1,
• printer 2 or
• file
or
▶ select a medium and check it with the space bar

ID: 43295243
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.2 Setting exposure data
Set the exposure data on the generator control desk.
ID: 43296267
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.3 Positioning patient
Position the patient according to the type of examination.
ID: 43297291
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.4 Selecting examination room
▶ with the keys F5, F6 or F7
or
by clicking with the mouse
• room 1,
• room 2 or
• room 3
or
▶ select a room and

▶ “check” it.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

ID: 43298315
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.5 Recording new patient data
The following applies even for the first patient:
Before recording patient data click on “NEW” or press F4.
You can record new patient data by
• transfering it from RIS,
• transfering it from a chip card or magnetic card,

4-68 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the patient data printer Optimus PDO 4.19

• scanning it in using a barcode reader or


• entering it on the keyboard.

Entering data on the keyboard:


▶ F11; the cursor is in the first field

▶ Fill in field;
▶ or correct after deleting with this button if necessary

▶ Move cursor
▶ to the next field

▶ to the previous field

▶ Fill in field;

Scanning in data using a barcode reader:


Please observe the Instructions for Use for the barcode reader.
Transfering data from a chip card:
▶ Put the chip card into the reader
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Open data mask by pressing


• F10 or - if the card reader has been configured as the standard
input device - with
• “NEW”
The following appears
Cardreader

Please insert card NEW: Cancel OK

The data is scanned in.


▶ or “OK”
If you want to cancel the data transfer:
“CANCEL” or “Esc” key
If you want to re-read the data: “READ CARD”

Transfering data from the input file:


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ F4, F9 or “NEW”

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-69


4.19 Operation of the patient data printer Optimus PDO

The following appears


Inputfile

c:\pdo\input.ris New: Cancel OK

▶ or click with the mouse


The selected data are highlighted.

▶ Confirm entry:
“OK” or double click this line.
If you want to cancel the selection: “CANCEL” or “Esc” key
ID: 43299339
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.6 Editing patient data
Normally you can enter and edit a patient's data on the keyboard only
before the first exposure. In special cases (e.g. emergencies) it is pos-
sible to edit patient data afterwards:
▶ “EDIT” or F2

▶ F11; the cursor is in the first box

▶ Edit data;
▶ or correct, if necessary

▶ Move cursor
▶ to the next field

▶ to the previous field

▶ Edit data.
ID: 43300363
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep08207


Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.19.7 Releasing exposure
Release exposure using the handswitch.
The exposure data appear on the screen if the relevant examination room
is selected.

4-70 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30 4.20

ID: 43301387
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator
Optimus 30
ID: 43302411
Created by: dep08207
Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26
Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.20.1 Operation – in a few words
This abridged manual is intended as a quick guide for skilled operators.
If you are not familiar with the generator, you must read the Instructions
for Use in detail, not least because they contain important safety in-
structions. Please note that the sequence of steps is only a suggestion.
Switching on/off
Switch on generator and system

Switch off generator and system

Making a “free exposure”


▶ Select “free cassette”

▶ Set exposure data


▶ Change focus, if necessary
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Prepare exposure

▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time

Making an APR exposure


▶ Switch on APR

▶ With exposures of children

▶ Select APR program


▶ Select auxiliary

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Change focus, if necessary
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Change exposure data, if necessary


▶ Prepare exposure

▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time

Making exposures with AEC and APR


▶ Switch on APR

▶ With exposures of children

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-71


4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30

▶ Select APR program


• Body region
• Organ
• Projection
▶ Select auxiliary

▶ Switch on measuring fields

▶ Change film-screen sensitivity, if necessary

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Correct density, if necessary

▶ Change focus, if necessary

▶ Change exposure data, if necessary


▶ Prepare exposure

▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time

Making exposures with AEC and without APR


▶ Select auxiliary

▶ Switch off APR, if necessary

▶ Set exposure data


▶ Change focus, if necessary

▶ Switch on AEC and select measuring field(s)

▶ Change film-screen sensitivity

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Correct density, if necessary

▶ Prepare exposure

▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time

ID: 43303435
Created by: dep08207
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Created: 23.02.2006 16:25:26


Changed by: dep08207
Changed: 23.02.2006 16:25:26 4.20.2 Operation in detail
Here you get to know in detail how to make exposures as shown in the
short version in chapter 4.1. The sequence of steps is a guide; you do
not necessarily have to follow them in this order.
Switching on/off
▶ Switch on generator and system.
The generator and all auxiliaries connected will be switched on.
The generator then performs a self-test:

4-72 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30 4.20

• All the LEDs and displays light up briefly.


• There is an audible signal.
• The kVp and mAs displays show the software version.
Example: P04.5 means version 4, release 5.
• The display shows “Self Testing Please Wait”
The self testing time is approx. 80 s.
During this test you should check:
• Do all the LEDs and displays light up?
• Is there an audible signal?
If, during this self-test, the computer detects an errror the kVp
display shows an error code. In case of errors see appendix.
If there is a fault please call Customer Service.
Before switching off the generator: wait 1 min
after pressing the exposure switch to brake the rotating anode.
This preserves the X-ray tube.
In an emergency switch off immediately!
▶ Switch off generator and system.
The generator and all auxiliaries connected will be switched off.

Selecting language
The Optimus “can speak” several languages. You can select the language
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

in the first level (body regions) of the APR mode by repeatedly pressing
the switch in the sequence German, English, Spanish, French, German,

Data which can be displayed
The following data can be displayed:
Current tube assembly status = stored heat
The current tube assembly status appears in the kVp display as
Hxx. H = heat units, xx = X-ray tube load in %.
All parameters of the last exposure
The parameters of the last exposure appear in the corresponding displays
as flashing values as long as “Reset” is pressed.
Making a “free exposure”
▶ Select “free cassette” on the generator

▶ Set exposure data


▶ Change focus, if necessary
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Prepare exposure
If, at the end of preparation, the symbol “Ready for exposure” is
not lit, at least one condition for exposure enable is not fulfilled.
In the kVp display either an error code appears or a remark about
the missing condition appears in the bottom line of the APR dis-
play.
In case of errors see appendix.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-73


4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30

When the symbol “Ready for exposure” lights up:


▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time
To release exposure press and hold down both buttons until the
audible signal can be heard at the end of the exposure.
During exposure the radiation symbol lights up.
If you let go of the button too soon, the exposure will abort; the
actually applied values of exposure time and mAs flash in the
corresponding displays, an alarm signal indicates the abort.

Making an APR exposure


▶ Select APR and patient’s build
There are 6 types to choose from:
Slim, normal or stout patient or - in combination with the “child”
button - slim, normal or stout child.
▶ Select APR program
When you select APR a list of body regions appears in the APR
display.
Select the region, the organ and the projection you want by press-
ing the corresponding buttons. For information on APR pro-
grams see the end of this chapter.
▶ Select auxiliary

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Change focus, if necessary

▶ Change exposure data, if necessary


▶ Prepare exposure
If, at the end of preparation, the symbol “Ready for exposure” is
not lit, at least one condition for exposure enable is not fulfilled.
In the kVp display either an error code appears or a remark about
the missing condition appears in the bottom line of the APR dis-
play.
In case of errors see appendix. When the symbol “Ready for ex-
posure” lights up:
▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time
To release exposure press and hold down both buttons until the
audible signal can be heard at the end of the exposure.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

During exposure the radiation symbol lights up.


If you let go of the button too soon, the exposure aborts; the
actually applied values of exposure time and mAs appear in the
corresponding displays, an error message appears in the kVp dis-
play. You cannot continue until you press “Reset”.

Exposures with AEC and APR


The APR programs contain all exposure data, even the mAs values which
are typical for the exposure. For safety reasons, with AEC exposures this

4-74 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30 4.20

mAs value will be enlarged by factor 10. If this value is reached the
exposure will be switched off.
▶ Select APR and patient’s build
There are 6 types to choose from:
Slim, normal or stout patient or - in combination with the “child”
button - slim, normal or stout child.
▶ Select APR program
A list of body regions appears in the APR display. Select the region
you want by pressing the corresponding button. For information
on APR programs see the end of this chapter.
▶ Select auxiliary

▶ Switch on measuring field

▶ Change film-screen sensitivity, if necessary

▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Correct density, if necessary
There are five density levels (-2/-1/0/+1/+2).
▶ Change focus, if necessary
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▶ Change exposure data, if necessary


▶ Prepare exposure
If, at the end of preparation, the symbol “Ready for exposure” is
not lit, at least one condition for exposure enable is not fulfilled.
In the kVp display either an error code appears or a remark about
the missing condition appears in the bottom line of the APR dis-
play.
In case of errors see appendix.
When the symbol “Ready for exposure” lights up:
▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time
To release exposure press and hold down both buttons until the
audible signal can be heard at the end of the exposure.
During exposure the radiation symbol lights up.
If you let go of the button too soon, the exposure aborts; the
actually applied values of exposure time and mAs appear in the
corresponding displays, an error message appears in the kVp dis-
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

play. You cannot continue until you press “Reset”.

Making exposures with AEC and without APR


The last mAs value used or set serves as a reference value for the expo-
sure.
This will be switched off when ten times the mAs value has been reached.
Ensure that you select an mAs value which is typical for the exposure.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-75


4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30

▶ Select auxiliary

▶ Switch off APR, if necessary

▶ Set exposure data


▶ Change focus, if necessary

▶ Switch on AEC and select measuring field(s).


By selecting a measuring field you switch on AEC. You can select
the measuring fields singly or combine them with one another.
▶ Select film-screen sensitivity
You can select only one film-screen sensitivity.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate
▶ Correct density, if necessary
There are five density levels (-2/-1/0/+1/+2).
▶ Prepare exposure:
If, at the end of preparation, the symbol “Ready for exposure” is
not lit, at least one condition for exposure enable is not fulfilled.
Then in the kVp display either an error code appears or a remark
about the missing condition appears in the bottom line of the
APR display.
In case of errors see appendix.
When the symbol “Ready for exposure” lights up:
▶ Release exposure: press both buttons at the same time
To release exposure press and hold down both buttons until the
audible signal can be heard at the end of the exposure.
During exposure the radiation symbol lights up.
If you let go of the button too soon, the exposure aborts; the
actually applied values of exposure time and mAs appear in the
corresponding displays, an error message appears in the kVp dis-
play. You cannot continue until you press “Reset”.

Overriding APR programs


You have the option of overriding APR programs permanently:
▶ Switch on APR
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Select APR program


When you select APR a list of body regions appears in the APR
display. Select the region, the organ and the projection you want
by pressing the corresponding buttons. For information on APR
programs see the next section.
Variable parameters:
▶ Change focus.

▶ Change exposure data

4-76 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30 4.20

▶ Select auxiliary

Line 1 Line 2 ▶ Save changed exposure data:


Line 3 Line 4
Line 5 Line 6

Line 7 Line 8
Bottom line

▶ Press one of these and selected projection (line 1, 3 or 5) togeth-


er.
The selected projection appears in line 1, 3 or 5.
The overridden data are saved once you hear a beep.

Fast access to the APR programs


Approx. 600 APR programs are saved in the generator. You can either
change the program data yourself or have Customer Service change it
for you according to your requirements. The display shows 7 programs
at a time. The other APR programs are stored in up to 3 levels.
When you switch on APR, the 1st level with 6 body regions appears.
When you select the region you want by pressing the corresponding
button, the 2nd level with the corresponding organs appears. When
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

you select the organ you want by pressing the corresponding button,
the 3rd level with the corresponding projections appears.
Select “MENU” to return to the level above.
Example:
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Operation 4-77


4.20 Operation of the single-phase generator Optimus 30

Level 1 body region

Level 2 organ

Level 3 projection

Fig. 4.22 The bold APR program is the one selected in each case.

Tube load alarm


When the tube load indicator shows a remaining capacity of 20% (=
80% load) or below an audible and visual alarm go off.
Without APR
• In the kV display “E49” and the kV value flash alternately.
• There in an audible beep.

With APR
• “<20% T.OVL” appears in the bottom line of the APR display.
• There in an audible beep.

The beeping stops when the tube assembly has cooled down.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4-78 Operation BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

5 Maintenance .................................................... 5-3

5.1 Obligations of the user ...................................................... 5-3


5.2 Tests by the user ................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Check AEC function acc. to IEC 60601-2-7 ..................... 5-4
5.4 Safety checks according to the Medical Device Directive
........................................................................................... 5-4
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 5-1


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

5-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 45222795

5 Maintenance
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 16:59:55

ID: 17629195
Created by: dep03476
Created: 06.09.2005 12:30:04
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 06.09.2005 12:30:04
5.1 Obligations of the user
As with any technical appliance this X-ray equipment also requires
• proper operation,
• regular testing by the user,
• regular service and repair.

By taking these precautions you maintain the operability and opera-


tional reliability of the X-ray equipment. As the user of an X-ray
equipment you are obliged according to accident prevention regula-
tions, the medical products law and other regulations to take such
precautions.
Maintenance consists of tests which the user can perform and main-
tenance which is performed under service agreements, Philips service
orders or by persons explicitly authorised to do so by Philips.
ID: 45224843
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Created by: dep03476


Created: 03.03.2006 17:05:31
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 03.03.2006 17:05:40
5.2 Tests by the user
The user must check the X-ray equipment for apparent defects (see ta-
ble). If operational defects or other departures from normal operational
behaviour occur, he must switch off the X-ray equipment and inform
the Service Organisation. He may only resume operation of the X-ray
equipment when it has been repaired. Operation using faulty compo-
nents may lead to an increased safety risk or unnecessarily high exposure
to radiation.
Interval Scope Method
Daily Stability test Acc. to DIN 6868, Parts 1, 2, 3
Daily Faulty display lamps, damaged com- Inspection
ponents, labels and warning signs
Daily Irregularities in the displays (flicker- Inspection
ing, failure)
Daily SID measurement on the automatic Inspection
collimator
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Weekly All cables and terminals (damage, Inspection


breakage)
Weekly Oil leaks and unusual noises ema- Inspection
nating from the high-voltage gener-
ator
Weekly Check AEC function See chapter 5.3
6 months Centring aids for X-ray tube assem- Inspection
bly and image receptor (marks,
catches, contacts)

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Maintenance 5-3


5.3 Check AEC function acc. to IEC 60601-2-7

ID: 45227275
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 17:08:19
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 03.03.2006 17:08:22
5.3 Check AEC function acc. to IEC 60601-2-7
• Select AEC fixed current
• Set following values: 40 kV, 25 mA, small focus
• SID: 100 cm
• Filter choice: no filter
• Release exposure and note exposure time
• Filter choice: max. Cu + Al
• Release exposure and note exposure time

The exposure time of the second exposure must be around twice as long.
ID: 17449099
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:44:27
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:44:27
5.4 Safety checks according to the Medical Device
Directive
The safety checks cover operability and operational reliability. They
must be performed at least every 2 years. These tests constitute part
of our preventive maintenance under our service agreements. They cov-
er
• visual checking for completeness and apparent damage or defects as
well as soiling, sticking parts and wear and tear which may affect
safety,
• testing the necessary monitoring, safety, display and indicating sys-
tems,
• measuring the safety-relevant output parameters,
• checking electrical safety as well as the operability of an internal en-
ergy supply,
• for the particular product other special technical tests according to
the generally accepted standards of engineering practice,
• other necessary tests specified by the manufacturer,
• recording results and filing the test reports in the X-ray system man-
ual (medical products logbook).

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

5-4 Maintenance BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

6 Servicing ........................................................... 6-3

6.1 Maintenance ...................................................................... 6-3


6.2 Repairs .............................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Recording results ............................................................... 6-3
6.4 Cleaning ............................................................................ 6-4
6.5 Disinfection ....................................................................... 6-4
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 6-1


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

6-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 45230475

6 Servicing
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 17:10:41

ID: 45232779
Created by: dep03476
Created: 03.03.2006 17:15:22
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 03.03.2006 17:15:33
6.1 Maintenance
X-ray units contain mechanical components which are subjected to wear
and tear due to operation.
The correct setting of the electromechanical and electronic assemblies
affects the functioning, image quality, electrical safety and exposure of
the patient and medical personnel to radiation.
Philips recommends:
• that the user perform the tests indicated in the table on a regular
basis,
• that you have the X-ray unit serviced by Philips Customer Service at
least once a year.
You must have heavily used X-ray equipment serviced more fre-
quently.

In this way you avoid endangering the patient and you meet your ob-
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ligations.
By entering into a service agreement with Philips you retain the value
and safety of your X-ray equipment. All the necessary maintenance,
including the safety tests for the purpose of preventive avoidance of
danger and the necessary settings for optimum image quality and min-
imum exposure to radiation, are performed at regular intervals. Philips
agrees on these intervals with you, taking the legal requirements into
account.
ID: 26966411
Created by: dep03476
Created: 01.11.2005 11:51:42
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 01.11.2005 11:51:46
6.2 Repairs

Faulty components which affect the safety of the equipment must be replaced by
genuine spare parts.

WARNING
ID: 26954379
Created by: dep03476
Created: 01.11.2005 11:48:02
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep03476


Changed: 01.11.2005 11:48:07
6.3 Recording results
Service and repairs must be entered in the medical products logbook,
including the following data:
• type and scope of work,
• if necessary, details of any changes to ratings or the working zone,
• date, person performing the work, signature.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Servicing 6-3


6.4 Cleaning

ID: 20860939
Created by: dep04257
Created: 19.09.2005 15:19:48
Changed by: dep04257
Changed: 19.09.2005 15:19:58
6.4 Cleaning

Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polish.

CAUTION

If you use other agents (e.g. with a high alcohol content) the material
will become dull or tend to crack.
When cleaning, please observe the following:
• Before cleaning the X-ray equipment switch off at the mains.
• Ensure that no water or liquid can enter the X-ray equipment. This
will prevent short-circuits in the electrical system and corrosion on
components.
• You should wipe enameled parts and aluminium surfaces only with
a damp cloth and mild detergent and then rub with a dry woolen
cloth.
• Rub down chrome parts with a dry woolen cloth only.…
ID: 19468299
Created by: dep04257
Created: 12.09.2005 15:54:28
Changed by: dep04257
Changed: 12.09.2005 15:54:47
6.5 Disinfection
The method of disinfection used must conform to the legal regulations
and guidelines regarding disinfection and explosion protection.

Never use any corrosive, solvent or gaseous detergents.

CAUTION

If you use disinfectants which form explosive mixtures of gases, these must first
have evaporated before you switch the X-ray equipment on again.

DANGER

• Before disinfecting the X-ray equipment switch off at the mains.


• You may disinfect all parts of the X-ray equipment, including the
accessories and connecting cables, by wiping only.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• Disinfection by spraying is not to be recommended because the dis-


infectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
• If you perform a room disinfection with an atomizer, you must
switch off the X-ray equipment first. When the X-ray equipment has
cooled down, cover it over carefully with a plastic sheet. When the
mist of disinfectant has subsided you can remove the plastic sheets
and disinfect the X-ray equipment by wiping.

6-4 Servicing BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

7 Technical data ................................................. 7-3

7.1 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 ....................................................... 7-3


7.1.1 Equipment data .................................................. 7-3
7.1.2 Labels ................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Compatibility ..................................................... 7-6
7.2 BuckyDiagnost FS ............................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 Equipment data .................................................. 7-6
7.2.2 Labels ................................................................. 7-7
7.2.3 Compatibility ..................................................... 7-9
7.3 BuckyDiagnost VS .......................................................... 7-10
7.3.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-10
7.3.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-11
7.3.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-14
7.3.4 Options ............................................................ 7-14
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

7.4 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF ................................................. 7-14


7.4.1 Equipement data .............................................. 7-14
7.4.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-15
7.4.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-17
7.5 BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 ................................. 7-17
7.5.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-17
7.5.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-18
7.5.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-22
7.6 BuckyDiagnost Trauma II ............................................... 7-22
7.6.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-22
7.6.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-23
7.6.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-24
7.7 TRAUMOB X ................................................................ 7-25
7.7.1 Equipment data ................................................ 7-25
7.7.2 Labels ............................................................... 7-26
7.7.3 Compatibility ................................................... 7-28
7.8 Optimus 50/65/80 .......................................................... 7-28
7.8.1 Electrical data ................................................... 7-28
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7.8.2 Setting ranges ................................................... 7-29


7.8.3 Ambient conditions for operation ..................... 7-29
7.8.4 Accuracy of the operating data, tolerances ......... 7-30
7.8.5 Methods of measurement ................................. 7-31
7.8.6 Labels ............................................................... 7-31
7.8.7 Compatible tube assemblies .............................. 7-32
7.9 Optimus 30 single-phase generator .................................. 7-32
7.9.1 Electrical data ................................................... 7-32
7.9.2 Ambient conditions for operation ..................... 7-33
7.9.3 Setting ranges and tolerances ............................ 7-33

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 7-1


Table of contents

7.9.4 Accuracy of operating data ................................ 7-33


7.9.5 Methods of measurement ................................. 7-34
7.9.6 Compatibility ................................................... 7-34
7.9.7 Labels ............................................................... 7-35
7.10 Optimus PDO ................................................................ 7-35
7.11 Tomography programs .................................................... 7-36
7.12 Interchangeable grids and usable SIDs ............................. 7-37
7.12.1 Grid data .......................................................... 7-37
7.12.2 Cassette sizes [cm/inch] .................................... 7-37

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 36879243
Created by: dep03476

7 Technical data
Created: 17.02.2006 15:51:27
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 15:51:38

ID: 37434123
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
7.1 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
ID: 37435147
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44 7.1.1 Equipment data
Energy supply Mains connect.: 230 V +10%/–15%; 50 Hz/
60 Hz ±2 Hz
Power consumption: ≤1.8 A
Ranges of movement
longitudinal 3530 mm, 3100 mm with tomography

– with extension 6030 mm, 5600 mm with tomography


transverse • 1474 mm BuckyDiagnost CS2
• 3194 mm BuckyDiagnost CS4

vertical 1480 mm
Lock-in positions max. 7, can be set by Customer Service
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

– vertical SID for BuckyDiagnost TH


– longitudinal Center BuckyDiagnost TH
– transverse • Center BuckyDiagnost VT at 0°
• Center BuckyDiagnost VS with track-
ing at 0°
• 3 SIDs for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT/VS at
90°
• Center BuckyDiagnost TH
• Center BuckyDiagnost VT
• Center BuckyDiagnost VS with track-
ing
Range of X-ray tube assembly swivel
round the
– vertical axis +180°/–165°, lock-in position every 45°
or
+165°/–180°, lock-in position every 45°
or
±180°, lock-in position every 45°
Philips recommends limitation to 165°
– horizontal axis 2 x 125°, lock-in pos. at 0°, ±90°
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Collimator manual/automatic
Inherent filtration approx. 0.3 mm Al/100 kV (IEC
60522/1999)
This value depends on the collimator and
may be different; you will find the exact
figure on the type number plate.
Max. angle of aperture 2 x 14.4° (usable range depends on the
tube)
Rotation ±45°

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-3


7.1 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4

SID measuring range 70 cm … 300 cm with automatic collima-


tion
Timer switch for light field indicator each programmable
and laser
Added filter 0 mm Al (0.0)
2 mm Al (2.0)
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (3.7 mm Al equiv-
alent)
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (6.0 mm Al equiv-
alent)
Tube assembly inherent filtration 2.5 mm Al/75 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
Weight of BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 285 kg/305 kg
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 37436171
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44 7.1.2 Labels
The system is put together according to the customer’s requirements,
so the labels shown are only samples. Country-specific labels are only
shown in the corresponding Instructions for Use.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-4 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 7.1

1 (G) BuckyDiagnost CS label


(H) (I) • 1A: Logo
(A) (B) • 1B: Address
(C) (D) • 1C: Type number
(E) (F) • 1D: Electrical data
(J) • 1E: IEC 60601-1
• 1F: IEC 60601-2-32p
• 1G: CE
• 1H: UL or CSA
• 1I: WEEE
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• 1J: Support add. label


2

3 X-ray tube label

4 Ceiling rails label


• Type number
• Logo
• Address
5 Longitudinal carriage label

6 Telescopic support CS label

7 BuckyDiagnost system label

8 Collimator label

9 Tube carrier add. label


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

10 Control grip label


• 10A: Type number
• 10B: Address
• 10C: FDA
• 10D,E: Laser label
11

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-5


7.2 BuckyDiagnost FS

ID: 37437195
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44 7.1.3 Compatibility
Generators
• Optimus
• MEDIO
• SCP versions

System components
• X-ray tube housing ROT 350/360
• Collimator with light field indicator, manual or motorized
• Lock-in positions for longitudinal and transverse movement
• DIAMENTOR

System options in combination with generators Optimus 30/50/65/80


• Cassette size sensing in combination with automatic collimation
• Tracking in combination with automatic collimation
• Tomography in combination with BuckyDiagnost TH or Bucky-
Diagnost TF and the Optimus 50/65/80 generators.

Accessories for tube carriers


• BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
• Rails for cable carrier CS
• Cable carrier CS
• Rail extension
ID: 37438219
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
7.2 BuckyDiagnost FS
ID: 37439243
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44 7.2.1 Equipment data
Energy supply Mains connect.: 230 V +10%/–15%; 50 Hz/
60 Hz ±2 Hz
Power consumption: ≤2.5 A
Ranges of movement
longitudinal 2760 mm

– with extension 4130 mm


transverse (optional) 150 mm
vertical 1600 mm
Lock-in positions Can be set by Customer Service
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

– longitudinal • Center BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF


• Center BuckyDiagnost VS with track-
ing
• Center BuckyDiagnost VT “horizon-
tal”
• 3 SIDs for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT/VS
“vertical”
Range of X-ray tube assembly swivel
round the
– vertical axis (tube arm swivel) ±90°, lock-in pos. at 0°, ±90°

7-6 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost FS 7.2

– horizontal axis of the tube arm 2 x 125°, lock-in pos. at 0°, ±90°
Collimator manual/automatic
Inherent filtration approx. 0.3 mm Al/100 kV (IEC
60522/1999)
This value depends on the collimator and
may be different; you will find the exact
figure on the type number plate.
Max. angle of aperture 2 x 14.4° (usable range depends on the
tube)
Rotation ±45°
SID measuring range 70 cm … 205 cm with automatic collima-
tion
Timer switch for light field indicator each programmable
and laser
Added filter 0 mm Al (0.0)
2 mm Al (2.0)
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (3.7 mm Al equiv-
alent)
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (6.0 mm Al equiv-
alent)
Tube assembly inherent filtration 2.5 mm Al/75 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
Weight 285 kg
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 37440267
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44 7.2.2 Labels
The system is put together according to the customer’s requirements,
so the labels shown are only samples. Country-specific labels are only
shown in the corresponding Instructions for Use.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-7


7.2 BuckyDiagnost FS

3 (G) (J) BuckyDiagnost FS label


(H) (I) • Logo
(A) (B) • Address
(C) (D)
• Type number
(E) (F)
• Electrical data
• IEC 60601-1
• IEC 60601-2-32
• CE
• UL or CSA
• WEEE
• FS label
4

5 BuckyDiagnost system label


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-8 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost FS 7.2

6 Tube carrier add. label

7 Control grip label


• Type number
• Address
• FDA
• Laser label
8 Collimator labels

ID: 37441291
Created by: dep03476
Created: 17.02.2006 16:40:44
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 17.02.2006 16:40:44 7.2.3 Compatibility
Generators
• Optimus
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• MEDIO
• SCP versions

System components
• X-ray tube housing ROT 350/360
• Collimator with light field indicator, manual or motorized
• Lock-in positions for longitudinal and transverse movement
• DIAMENTOR

System options in combination with generators Optimus 50/65/80


• Cassette size sensing in combination with automatic collimation
• Tracking in combination with automatic collimation
• Tomography in combination with BuckyDiagnost FS S, Bucky-
Diagnost TH2 or BuckyDiagnost TF and the Optimus 50/65/80
generators.

Accessories for tube carriers


• Rail extension for BuckyDiagnost FS S and BuckyDiagnost FS C.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-9


7.3 BuckyDiagnost VS

ID: 37774603
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 10:43:34
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 10:43:43
7.3 BuckyDiagnost VS
ID: 37813387
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 11:24:41
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 11:24:41 7.3.1 Equipment data
Conformity with IEC 60601-1 • Safety class 3
• Remote control (optional)
• Applied part of type B 1)
• Degree of protection against harmful
ingress of water: IPXO
• Designed for continous operation
• Service life: 300,000 exposures or 10
years
Grid Interchangeable grid (standard)
Cassette size sensing Optional (not with digital detector)
Cassette tray with manual inter- • manual
changeable grid • with automatic cassette size sensing
• with ACL4:
˗ automatic cassette loading
˗ automatic cassette size sensing
˗ manual interchangeable grid
Cassette sizes [cm/inch] 2) 18 x 24 / ––––––
18 x 43 / 7 x 17
–––––– / 8 x 10
20 x 40 / ––––––
24 x 24 / 9.5 x 9.5
24 x 30 / ––––––
–––––– / 10 x 12
–––––– / 11 x 14
30 x 30 / 12 x 12
30 x 35 / ––––––
30 x 40 / ––––––
35 x 35 / 14 x 14
35 x 43 / 14 x 17
40 x 40 / ––––––
Front panel, dimens. (H x W) 575 mm x 596 mm
Distance front panel – film 54 mm
Al equivalent ≤0.6 mm
Basic unit

• Height/height adjustment 206 cm/150 cm


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Front panel vertical lower posi- 30 cm


tion (center image receptor)

• Front panel horizontal lower po- 54.2 cm


sition

• Tilt angle –20° … 90°

Weight 130 kg … 255 kg, depending on version


Cassette holder • all cassettes from 18 cm x 24 cm to
35 cm x 43 cm
• compatible with all versions of the
BuckyDiagnost VS

7-10 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost VS 7.3

1
This X-ray equipment complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Op-
eration is subject to the following two conditions:
• This X-ray equipment may not cause harmful interference and
• This X-ray equipment must be shielded from harmful interference
including interference which can cause undesirable reactions.

Explanation of Class B of the FCC rules:


This X-ray equipment has been tested and complies with the limits set
forth for Class B digital devices (Part 15 of the FCC rules). These limits
were fixed to provide effective protection against harmful interference.
This X-ray equipment generates, uses and can emit transmission energy.
This can cause harmful interference with radio communications devices
if the X-ray equipment is not operated according to the FCC rules.
Nonetheless, the possibility of interference arising under certain condi-
tions cannot be ruled out. If this X-ray equipment causes harmful
interference with radio or television receivers (noticeable when turning
on/off ), the user can attempt to eliminate it as follows:
• Move or rotate receiving aerial.
• Increase distance between X-ray equipment and receiver.
• Connect the X-ray equipment to a different electric circuit than the
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or a radio/TV specialist.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

2
Cassettes to ISO standard. The standard sets forth the measurements
but not the design. Therefore individual cassettes with an unusual design
may “not fit” despite conforming to the standard, e.g. “3M”.
ID: 37814411
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 11:24:41
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 11:24:41 7.3.2 Labels
The system is put together according to the customer’s requirements,
so the labels shown are only samples.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-11


7.3 BuckyDiagnost VS

2
1

T
rgackin
8 3
Memo
ry

9 Memo
ry
10
4
6, 7
5

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-12 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost VS 7.3

2 Wall stand label


Segment Control Unit
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: Barcode
3 Bucky unit 2 digital label
• A: Logo
• B: UL or CSA
• C: Type number
• D: Barcode
4 BuckyDiagnost VS label
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: Data information
• E: IEC 60601-1
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• F: IEC 60601-2-32
• G: FDA
• H: UL or CSA
• I: CE
• J: CCC
• K: HF Transmitter
5 Motorized stand label
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: Barcode
6 BuckyDiagnost VS label
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: Data information
• E: IEC 60601-1
• F: IEC 60601-2-32
• G: FDA
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• H: UL or CSA
• I: CE
• J: CCC
• K: HF Transmitter
7 Type number plate
Motorized tiltable unit
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: Barcode

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-13


7.4 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF

8 Wall stand display label


• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: Barcode
9 (A) • A: FCC/UL remote control
(B) • B: CSA remote control

10 Address

11 Babix holder label


• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: CE
ID: 37815435
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 11:24:41
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 11:24:41 7.3.3 Compatibility
Generators
• Optimus series
• SCP versions together with manual collimator
ID: 37816459
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 11:24:41
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 11:24:41 7.3.4 Options
• Wireless remote control in combination with motorized vertical
movement
• Floor attachment for installation anywhere in the room

System options
• Cassette size sensing in combination with automatic collimation
• Tracking in combination with automatic collimation
ID: 37820555
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 11:25:00
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 11:25:10
7.4 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF
ID: 37830923
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:19:58
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:19:58 7.4.1 Equipement data
Energy supply Voltage: 230 V +10%/–15%; 50 Hz/60 Hz
±2 Hz
only table BuckyD. TH2 Power consumption: ≤6 A
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

only table BuckyD. TF Power consumption: ≤0.3 A, with ACL4:


≤0.6 A
Table top 240 cm x 75 cm
Table top incl. rails 240 cm x 85 cm (optional für BuckyDiag-
nost TH2)
200 cm x 75 cm (optional)

7-14 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF 7.4

Load-bearing capacity 210 kg irrespective of the position of the


patient
318 kg in the table top center
375 kg without vertical adjustment!
Attenuation equivalent <0.75 mm Al equivalent
Film-table top distance Manual cassette tray: 6.5 cm or with cas-
sette size sensing ACL4: 5.6 cm
Vertical adjustment of table top 51.5 cm … 91.5 cm; the preferred height
(BuckyD. TH2) can be set by Customer Service between
70 cm and 80 cm
Table top movement Transverse, 75 cm wide: 26 cm (±13 cm)
Transverse, 85 cm wide: 36 cm (±18 cm)
Longitudinal:
• 240-cm table top: 120 cm (±60 cm)
• 200-cm table top: 80 cm (±40 cm)
Bucky carriage movement ±22.5 cm
Cassette tray with manual inter- • manual
changeable grid • with automatic cassette size sensing
• with ACL4:
˗ automatic cassette loading
˗ automatic cassette size sensing
˗ manual interchangeable grid
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Equipotential bonding pin (BuckyDiag- This pin is used when connecting up oth-
nostTH2) er equipment if the latter requires equi-
potential bonding for medical reasons.
Weight ≤260 kg
Inherent filtration to IEC 60522/1999! Tube assembly: 2.5 mm Al at 75 kV
Collimator: 0.3 mm Al equivalent at 80
kV
Filter value: refer to label collimator
Service life. 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 37831947
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:19:58
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:19:58 7.4.2 Labels
The system is put together according to the customer’s requirements,
so the labels shown are only samples. Country-specific labels are only
shown in the corresponding Instructions for Use.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-15


7.4 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF

1 Table top label


• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: FDA
2 (on (A) (B) BuckyD. TH2/TF label
the • A: Logo
(C) (D)

(E) (F)
rear) (G) (H) • B: Address
(I) (J)
• C: Type number
• D: Electrical data
(K)

• E: IEC 60601-1
• F: IEC 60601-2-32
• G: UL or CSA
• H: Disposal
• I: Info label
• J: CE
• K: Bucky table label
3 ACL4 f. BuckyD. TH2 label
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: UL or CSA
4
(head)

(feet)

5 (on (A) (B) Bucky unit label


the • A: Logo
(C) (D)

(E) (F)
cas- • B: Address
(G)
sette
tray) • C: Type number
• D: UL or CSA
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• E: Barcode
• F: Electrical data
• G: Cassette tray label

7-16 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 7.5

ID: 37832971
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:19:58
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:19:58 7.4.3 Compatibility
Generators
• Optimus for all options
• SCP versions

System options
• Buckys with interchangeable grid
˗ manual
˗ manual with cassette size sensing
˗ motorized cassette transport with interchangeable grids
• Cassette size sensing in combination with automatic collimation
• Tracking in combination with automatic collimation
• Tomography in combination with BuckyDiagnost CS2, CS4 or
BuckyDiagnost FS S and the generators Optimus 30/50/65/80
• Upgrading to DigitalDiagnost (TH2)
• BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
ID: 37836299
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:25:42
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:25:52
7.5 BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4
ID: 37845515
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Created by: dep03476


Created: 20.02.2006 12:47:57
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:47:57 7.5.1 Equipment data
Grid GRP cover
36 L/cm
f0 = 110 cm, r = 8, r = 12
f0 = 140 cm, r = 8, r = 12
f0 = 180 cm, r = 12

Cassette size sensing Standard


Interchangeable grid Standard
Cassette tray with manual inter- • manual
changeable grid • with automatic cassette size sensing
• with ACL4:
˗ automatic cassette loading
˗ automatic cassette size sensing
˗ manual interchangeable grid
Front panel, dimens. (H x W) 575 mm x 596 mm
Distance front panel – film 54 mm
Al equivalent ≤0.6 mm
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Basic unit

• Height/height adjustment 206 cm/150 cm

• Front panel vertical lower posi- 30 cm


tion (center image receptor)

• Front panel horizontal lower po- 70 cm


sition

• Tilt angle –20° … 90°

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-17


7.5 BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4

Weight

• BuckyDiagnost VE/VT 150 kg/205 kg

• BuckyDiagnost VE 130 kg

Cassette holder all cassettes from 18 cm x 24 cm to 35


cm x 43 cm, compatible with all versions
of the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 37846539
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:47:57
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:47:57 7.5.2 Labels
The system is put together according to the customer’s requirements,
so the labels shown are only samples. Country-specific labels are only
shown in the corresponding Instructions for Use.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-18 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 7.5
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-19


7.5 BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-20 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 7.5

1 (A) (B) Column label


(C) (D) (E) • A: Type number
(F) (G) • B: FDA
(H) (I) • C: UL or CSA
(J) (K) • D: Manufacturer
(L) (M) • E: CE
• F: Logo
• G: Address
• H: Type number
• I: UL or CSA
• J: IEC 60601-1
• K: IEC 60601-2-32
• L: WEEE
• M: CE
2

3
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

4 ACL4 label
• A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: UL or CSA
5

6 (on the cassette (A) (B) Bucky unit label


tray) (C) (D) • A: Logo
(E) (F) • B: Address
(G)
• C: Type number
• D: UL or CSA
• E: Barcode
• F: Electrical data
• G: Cassette plate type num-
ber
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7 Stretch grip label

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-21


7.6 BuckyDiagnost Trauma II

ID: 37847563
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:47:57
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:47:57 7.5.3 Compatibility
Generators
• Optimus
• MEDIO
• SCP versions

System options in combination with generators Optimus 30/50/65/80


• Bucky with motorized cassette transport and interchangeable grids
• Cassette size sensing in combination with automatic collimation
• Tracking in combination with automatic collimation
ID: 37850891
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 12:48:22
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 12:48:31
7.6 BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
ID: 37860747
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 13:04:54
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:04:54 7.6.1 Equipment data
Movements in combination with BuckyDiagnost CS2, CS4
Longitudinal 3555 mm, 5985 mm with extension
Transverse 1474 mm BuckyDiagnost CS2
3194 mm BuckyDiagnost CS4
Vertical Ceiling height >3 m: 1480 mm
Ceiling height <3 m: 1365 mm
Rotation round the stand axis 360°, lock-in position every 45°
180°/–165° or
165°/–180° or
±180°; Philips recommends limitation on
one side to 165°.
Rotation of the U-arm 360°, lock-in position every 15°
SID 115 cm, tube assembly centered on cas-
sette holder
Cassette holder
Tilt 0°, 15°, 30°
Attenuation equivalent 0.3 mm Al
Cassette sizes (portrait and land- 24 cm x 30 cm
scape by turning the cassette hold- 18 cm x 24 cm (optional)
er) 18 cm x 43 cm (optional)
35 cm x 43 cm (optional)
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8" x 10" (optional)


10" x 12" (optional)
Cassette type Normal cassettes, rear panel without lead
lining
Grid Fixed grid or grid cassettes
Automatic exposure control Measuring chamber behind the cassette
Collimator (BuckyDiagnost CS) manual
Inherent filter 0.3 mm Al/80 kV (IEC 60522/1999)

7-22 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


BuckyDiagnost Trauma II 7.6

Angle of aperture 2 x 15°


Rotation ±45°
SID measuring range 30 cm … … 290 cm
Timer switch for light field indicator 30 s
and laser
Added filter 0 mm Al
2 mm Al
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al
Tube assembly inherent filtration 2.5 mm Al/75 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 37861771
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 13:04:54
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:04:54 7.6.2 Labels
The system is put together according to the customer’s requirements,
so the labels shown are only samples. Country-specific labels are only
shown in the corresponding Instructions for Use.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-23


7.6 BuckyDiagnost Trauma II

1 (A) (B) BuckyDiagnost CS label


• A: Logo
(C) (D)

(E) (F)

(G) (H) • B: Address


(I)
• C: Type number
• D: Electrical data
• E: IEC 60601-1
• F: IEC 60601-2-32
• G: UL or CSA
• H: WEEE
• I: CE
2 BuckyD. Trauma II label

3 Warning The tube arm must always be equipped with a cassette


holder. The tube arm may only be moved with the cassette holder
attached. While it is moving, you must hold on to the tube arm
or follow it with your hand.
4 Grid data

5 (on the cassette Cassette holder label


tray) • A: Logo
• B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: FDA
ID: 37862795
Created by: dep03476
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Created: 20.02.2006 13:04:54


Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:04:54 7.6.3 Compatibility
• BuckyDiagnost CS ceiling suspension unit
• BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF (only 75 cm table top)

7-24 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


TRAUMOB X 7.7

ID: 37866123
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 13:07:27
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:07:51
7.7 TRAUMOB X
ID: 37867659
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 13:07:33
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:07:51 7.7.1 Equipment data
Table top

• dimensions 600 mm x 2290 mm

• height 705 mm …… 1050 mm

• tilt 10°

• attenuation equivalent 0.69 mm Al equivalent

Weight 51 kg
Max. load 135 kg
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-25


7.7 TRAUMOB X

ID: 37869195
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 13:07:39
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:07:51 7.7.2 Labels

4
1
2

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-26 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


TRAUMOB X 7.7

3 (A) (B) TRAUMOB X label


(C) (D) • A: Logo
(E) • B: Address
• C: Type number
• D: CE
• E: Disposal
4 (visible when table top height
is over 890 mm)
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-27


7.8 Optimus 50/65/80

ID: 37870731
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 13:07:42
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 13:07:51 7.7.3 Compatibility
• BuckyDiagnost Trauma
• BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4
• Mobile cassette stand
• C-arm
• Mobile exposure units
ID: 37874955
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 17:14:10
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 17:14:19
7.8 Optimus 50/65/80
ID: 38130827
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.1 Electrical data
Optimus 50 Optimus 65 Optimus 80
Safety class 1 1 1
EMC emission (IEC 60601-1-2/ Group 1, class A
CISPR 11)
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10
years
400 V ±10%, 50 Hz und 60 Hz, 3 phases
Power supply
Mains resistance/ Max. current ≤0.3 Ω/145 A ≤0.2 Ω/190 A ≤0.2 Ω/230 A
input
Max. current input is reached un- Generator output 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
der the following conditions:
Technique kV-mAs kV-mAs kV-mAs
Focus large large large
High voltage 77 kV 81 kV 80 kV
mAs product 65 mAs 80 mAs 100 mAs
Exposure time 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
Electric power
(IEC 60601-2-7)
High-voltage generation Converter
Ondulation Direct voltage
Exposure Max. voltage 150 kV 150 kV 150 kV
Nominal electric power (100 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

kV; 0.1 s)
Max. electr. power 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
650 mA/70 kV/0.1 s 900 mA/70 kV/0.1 s 1100 mA/70 kV/0.1 s
625 mA/80 kV/0.1 s 812 mA/80 kV/0.1 s 1000 mA/80 kV/0.1 s
500 mA/100 kV/0.1 s 60 mA/100 kV/0.1 s 800 mA/100 kV/0.1 s
400 mA/125 kV/0.1 s 520 mA/125 kV/0.1 s 640 mA/125 kV/0.1 s
333 mA/150 kV/0.1 s 433 mA/150 kV/0.1 s 533 mA/150 kV/0.1 s

7-28 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus 50/65/80 7.8

Exposure techniques
• kV, continuously falling load
• kV, mA, constant current operation, automatic exposure control
(two-factor technique)
• TDC, automatic exposure control with tomography (dose-rate con-
trolled tomography)
• kV, mAs, constant load (two-factor technique)
• kV, mAs, s, constant load (three-factor technique)
• kV, mA, s, constant load (three-factor technique)
ID: 38131851
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.2 Setting ranges
Optimus 50 Optimus 65 Optimus 80
Radiography without auto- Tube voltage 40 kV … 150 kV, adjustable in steps of 1 kV or according to a sequence the steps
matic exposure control of which roughly correspond to an exposure increment 1). In the case of tubes with
(AEC) lower maximum tube voltage this is limited accordingly.
Tube current For kV-mA-s and kV-mAs For kV-mA-s and kV-mAs For kV-mA-s and kV-mAs
techniques this can be ad- techniques this can be ad- techniques this can be ad-
justed in steps of 25%1), justed in steps of 25%1), justed in steps of 25%1),
12% or 6% 12% or 6% 12% or 6%
1 mA … 650 mA 1 mA … 900 mA 1 mA … 1100 mA
mAs 0.5 mAs … 850 mAs, adjustable in steps of 25% 1), 12% or 6%
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Compliance range as per IEC 60601-2-7:


2.0 mAs … 850 mAs
Exposure times 1 ms … 6 s (16 s) adjustable in steps of 25%1), 12% or 6%
Radiography with AEC mAs 2) 0.5 mAs … 600 mAs
Switching times 1 ms … 4 s
Density correction Adjustable in steps of 25%, 12% 1) or 6%
Tomography mAs 0.5 mAs … 850 mAs in steps of 25%, 12% or 6%
Switching times 1 ms … 6 s (16 s) in steps of 25%, 12% or 6%
Tomography with automat- mAs 0.5 mAs … 600 mAs in steps of 25%, 12% or 6%
ic exposure control (TDC)
Switching times 1 ms … 6 s

Default values:
1)

±25% corresponds to ±1 exposure density increment.


±12% density correction corresponds to ±0.5 exposure density incre-
ments.
2)
The maximum mAs value can be set lower by Customer Service.
ID: 38132875
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Created by: dep03476


Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.3 Ambient conditions for operation
Temperature 10°C … 40°C
Rel. humidity 15% … 90%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa … 110 kPa

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-29


7.8 Optimus 50/65/80

ID: 38133899
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.4 Accuracy of the operating data, tolerances
Compliance
with the requirements of IEC 60601-2-7 applying the IEC test condi-
tions.
Current-time reference product
Reference value for the compliance range of linearity of the emitted
radiation.
This table applies to tubes with X-ray generator nominal power and an
exposure time of 100 ms at 100 kV. For tubes with low focus power,
the current-time reference product must be converted accordingly.
Current-time reference product
50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
70 kV, 320 mA 32 mAs
70 kV, 400 mA 40 mAs
70 kV, 500 mA 50 mAs
100 kV, 250 mA 25 mAs
100 kV, 320 mA 32 mAs
100 kV, 400 mA 40 mAs
150 kV, 160 mA 16 mAs
150 kV, 200 mA 20 mAs
150 kV, 250 mA 25 mAs

Requirement Compliance

Exposure
Reproducibility of emitted radiation complies
Linearity of emitted radiation

• in relation to current-time product in the range of >2 mAs

• assuming consecutive settings or settings over the entire range of settings


with a factor of ≤2
Consistency of emitted radiation during au- complies
tomatic exposure control
Accuracy of the X-ray tube load factors complies
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• Tube voltage
• Tube current
• Tube load time
• Current-time product
• Current-time reference product

Radiography (Typical range of application)


Tube voltage ±5%, additional ±1 kV
Tube current-time product ±3%, additional ±0.5 mAs

7-30 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus 50/65/80 7.8

Tube current ±5%, additional ±0.5 mA


mAs post-exposure display in kV technique ±3%, additional ±0.5 mAs
Post-exposure time display ±3%, additional ±0.5 ms
Exposure time
Optimus 50 ±5%, additional ±0.5 ms
for I<10 mA ±5%, additional ±25 ms
Optimus 65/80 ±5%, additional ±0.5 ms
for I<10 mA ±5%, additional ±25 ms
for I≤2 mA ±5%, additional +25 ms/–85 ms

ID: 38134923
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.5 Methods of measurement
X-ray tube voltage
Tube voltage is measured with the aid of balanced high-voltage bleeders
in the high-voltage circuit.
X-ray tube current
Tube current is measured on the cathode side in the rectified high-
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

voltage circuit of the X-ray generator.


Exposure time
Exposure time is measured between 75% ±7.5% peak voltage of the
high-voltage rise edge and 75% ±7.5% peak voltage of the high-voltage
fall edge.
Current-time product
Current-time product is measured on the cathode side in the rectified
high-voltage circuit of the X-ray generator.
ID: 38135947
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.6 Labels
All labels are located on a label bracket at the top left corner of the
cabinet, marked by this symbol.
If you swing out the label bracket the following labels appear:
• X-RAY CONTROL (control unit) with indication of power class,
serial number, type number and the name and the address of the
manufacturer
• X-RAY H.V. GENERATOR (high-voltage generator) with indica-
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

tion of power class, type number, serial number and the name and
address of the manufacturer
• Technical data label
• Date of manufacture
• Certification label

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-31


7.9 Optimus 30 single-phase generator

ID: 38136971
Created by: dep03476
Created: 20.02.2006 18:07:26
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 20.02.2006 18:07:26 7.8.7 Compatible tube assemblies
You can operate the Optimus 30/50/65/80 generators with the follow-
ing tubes from Philips. Mixed operation with the “high-speed” rotor
control is possible.
Philips recommends the following standard tubes:
• RO 1648
• RO 1750
• SRO 0951
• SRO 2550
• SRO 33100

For other tubes which can be connected up consult Customer Service.


You can connect up the Patient Data Organizer (PDO) to any Optimus.
For more information please contact Philips Customer Service.
ID: 39042059
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 17:38:08
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 17:38:19
7.9 Optimus 30 single-phase generator
ID: 39109003
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.1 Electrical data

Conformity with IEC 60601-1


Safety class I
EMC emission (IEC 60601-1-2/CISPR Group 1, class B
11)
Degree of protection against harmful in- IP X0
gress of water
Designed for continous operation
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years
Energy supply 208 V, 230 V, 240 V ±10%, 50 Hz / 60
Hz, 1 phase
Mains resistance ≤0.07 Ω / 208 V
≤0.09 Ω / 240 V
Max. current input 145 A
is reached under the following condi- 32 kW
tions:
Tube power
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Technique kV-mAs
Focus

• RO 1750 0,6 /1,3

• RO 1648 0,7/1,5

High voltage 40 kV … 125 kV


mAs product 0.5 mAs … 500 mAs
Min. mAs product depending on tube 0.5 mAs
voltage

7-32 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus 30 single-phase generator 7.9

Exposure time 2 ms … 10 s
Max. nominal power for 100 kV and 0.1 32 kW
s
Tube voltage / tube current for max. out- 100 kV / 320 mA
put power
High voltage generator Converter
Ondulation Multipulse
Nominal voltage at exposure 125 kV
Tube voltage at max. output current 100 kV / 320 mA
Max. tube current at max. tube voltages 250 mA / 125 kV
Permanent power 500 W

ID: 39110027
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.2 Ambient conditions for operation
Temperature 10°C … 40°C
Rel. humidity 15% … 90%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa … 110 kPa

ID: 39111051
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Created by: dep03476


Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.3 Setting ranges and tolerances
High voltage 40 kV … 125 kV ±(5% + 1 kVp)
in steps of 1 kV or Renard scale
mAs product 0.5 mAs … 500 mAs ±(5% + 0.1 mAs)
Current 8 mA … 320 mA ±(5% + 1 mA)
Exposure time 2 ms … 10 s ±(1% + 0.1 ms)

ID: 39111563
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.4 Accuracy of operating data
Compliance with requirements of IEC 60601-2-7 applying the IEC test
conditions.
Requirement Compliance
Reproducibility of emitted radiation complies
Linearity of emitted radiation in relation to in the range of ≥2 mAs
current-time product
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Linearity of emitted radiation assuming con- over the entire range of settings
secutive settings or settings with a factor of
≤2
Consistency of emitted radiation during au- complies
tomatic exposure control
Accuracy of the X-ray tube load factors

• Tube voltage complies

• Tube current complies

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-33


7.9 Optimus 30 single-phase generator

Requirement Compliance

• Tube load time complies

• Current-time product complies

• Current-time reference product complies

ID: 39112587
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.5 Methods of measurement
See chapter 7.8.5
ID: 39113611
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.6 Compatibility
You can operate the generator described with the X-ray tubes RO 1750
and RO 1648 from Philips.

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-34 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus PDO 7.10

ID: 39114635
Created by: dep03476
Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:11
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:11 7.9.7 Labels
Control desk 1

1, 3
6
2
Mains connection case

5 4
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

X-ray generator
2, 3, 4
5

rear

1 X-RAY Control
2 X-RAY Generator
3 Certification label and date of manufacture
4 UL label
5 Technical data label and name and address of manufacturer
6 Warning

ID: 39133835
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Created by: dep03476


Created: 21.02.2006 18:00:31
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 21.02.2006 18:00:43
7.10 Optimus PDO
Compatibility
The Optimus PDO was tested with the following devices:
• Optimus 30/50/65/80 from version 2.1
• DIAMENTOR M4
• Chip card reader from Philips
˗ PE 115
• Magnetic card reader

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-35


7.11 Tomography programs

˗ CHERRY G 80-1501 HAD, integrated into the keyboard


˗ Every compatible card reader
• Barcode reader:
˗ Welch Allyn SCANTEAM 3000 CCD
• PC with following specifications:
˗ Operating system
Windows 3.1/3.11/95/98/NT 4.0
Windows XP
W2000
˗ At least 486 processor
˗ At least 8 MB RAM
˗ VGA graphics card
˗ 3 MB of free hard disk space is necessary for installation.

If you want to operate your computer together with a Powersaver, a HD


Saver or the like, you must test this combination individually. Due to
the vast quantity of computers available Philips cannot give any general
guidelines. If in doubt, do not use a Powersaver.
ID: 39434251
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 09:23:48
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 09:23:59
7.11 Tomography programs
You can have four of the following tomography programs set by Cus-
tomer Service with tomographic heights from 10 to 250 mm in 1 mm
steps:
Tomography thickness ≥5 mm Recommended combination
1. 8° 0.8 s
2. 8° 1s *
3. 8° 2s

Tomography thickness ≥2.2 mm Recommended combination


4. 20° 0.8 s
5. 20° 1s *
6. 20° 2s
7. 20° 3s

Tomography thickness approx. 2 mm Recommended combination


8. 30° 0.8 s
9. 30° 1s *
10. 30° 2s
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

11. 30° 3s
12. 30° 4s

7-36 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Interchangeable grids and usable SIDs 7.12

Tomography thickness ≤1.8 mm Recommended combination


13. 40° 1.2 s
14. 40° 2s *
15. 40° 3s
16. 40° 4s

ID: 39437451
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 09:31:10
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 09:31:19
7.12 Interchangeable grids and usable SIDs
ID: 39439371
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 09:35:48
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 09:35:48 7.12.1 Grid data
Color l/cm Ratio f0 [cm] Min. SID [cm] Max. SID [cm]

Red 36 12 110 97 129


Blue 36 12 140 115 180
Green 36 12 180 140 252
Pink 36 8 110 97 150
Yellow 36 8 140 103 205
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 39441675
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 09:45:50
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 09:45:50 7.12.2 Cassette sizes [cm/inch]
• 18 x 24 / ––––––
• 18 x 43 / 7 x 17
• –––––– / 8 x 10
• 20 x 40 / ––––––
• 24 x 24 / 9.5 x 9.5
• 24 x 30 / ––––––
• –––––– / 10 x 12
• –––––– / 11 x 14
• 30 x 30 / 12 x 12
• 30 x 35 / ––––––
• 30 x 40 / ––––––
• 35 x 35 / 14 x 14
• 35 x 43 / 14 x 17
• 40 x 40 / ––––––
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Technical data 7-37


7.12 Interchangeable grids and usable SIDs

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

7-38 Technical data BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

8 Accessories ...................................................... 8-3

8.1 Abort using accessories ...................................................... 8-3


8.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT ............... 8-3
8.2.1 Normal use ......................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Prohibited use ..................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Legend ................................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Installation .......................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 Dismantling ........................................................ 8-5
8.2.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette ..................... 8-6
8.2.7 Removing a cassette ............................................ 8-7
8.2.8 Technical data .................................................... 8-7
8.2.9 Compatibility ..................................................... 8-7
8.2.10 Labels ................................................................. 8-8
8.3 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS ...................... 8-8
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

8.3.1 Labels ................................................................. 8-8


8.3.2 Normal use ......................................................... 8-8
8.3.3 Prohibited use ..................................................... 8-9
8.3.4 Legend ................................................................ 8-9
8.3.5 Installation .......................................................... 8-9
8.3.6 Dismantling ...................................................... 8-10
8.3.7 Inserting and positioning a cassette ................... 8-11
8.3.8 Removing a cassette .......................................... 8-12
8.3.9 Technical data .................................................. 8-12
8.3.10 Compatibility ................................................... 8-12
8.4 Long cassette holder ........................................................ 8-13
8.4.1 Normal use ....................................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Prohibited use ................................................... 8-13
8.4.3 Legend .............................................................. 8-13
8.4.4 Installation ........................................................ 8-13
8.4.5 Dismantling ...................................................... 8-15
8.4.6 Inserting a cassette ............................................ 8-15
8.4.7 Removing a cassette .......................................... 8-16
8.4.8 Technical data .................................................. 8-16
8.4.9 Compatibility ................................................... 8-16
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8.4.10 Labels ............................................................... 8-17


8.5 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 ....... 8-17
8.5.1 Normal use ....................................................... 8-17
8.5.2 Prohibited use ................................................... 8-17
8.5.3 Legend .............................................................. 8-18
8.5.4 Operation ......................................................... 8-18
8.5.5 Technical data .................................................. 8-19
8.5.6 Compatibility ................................................... 8-19
8.5.7 Labels ............................................................... 8-19

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 8-1


Table of contents

8.6 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS ................................ 8-19


8.6.1 Customer Service .............................................. 8-19
8.6.2 Normal use ....................................................... 8-20
8.6.3 Prohibited use ................................................... 8-20
8.6.4 Legend .............................................................. 8-20
8.6.5 Operation ......................................................... 8-20
8.6.6 Technical data .................................................. 8-21
8.6.7 Compatibility ................................................... 8-21
8.6.8 Labels ............................................................... 8-22
8.7 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF ................................................. 8-22
8.7.1 Attaching the handswitch ................................. 8-22
8.7.2 Removing the handswitch ................................. 8-22

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 39443467
Created by: dep03476

8 Accessories
Created: 22.02.2006 09:48:06
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 09:48:37

ID: 39445387
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
8.1 Abort using accessories

When using the accessories, please take care not to injure the patient due to
uncontrolled movement of the equipment.

WARNING
ID: 39446411
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
8.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
ID: 39473035
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.1 Normal use
This cassette holder is hung in front of the front panel of the COSMOS
BS or the wall Bucky BuckyDiagnost VE/VT. A grid is not necessary
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

for pediatric exposures.


ID: 39474059
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.2 Prohibited use
You must not use this cassette holder
• with a front-mounted anti-scatter grids
• on devices other than those stated above.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-3


8.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT

ID: 39475083
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.3 Legend

2
1 1

7
8

1 Arm for fitting into the rails


2 Chin rest
3 Top cassette carrier
4 Bottom cassette carrier
5 Lever for releasing the bottom cassette carrier
6 Holding rail; prevents lifting and falling out
7

8 Disengage suction cup

ID: 39476107
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep03476


Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.4 Installation

Ensure that the cassette holder is configured to your BuckyDiagnost VE/VT ac-
cording to the accompanying installation manual. When the cassette holder is in
place the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT is no longer counterbalanced.

CAUTION

8-4 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT 8.2

1 2

3
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 39477131
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.5 Dismantling
Remove cassette, if necessary
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-5


8.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT

1 2

Fig. Press button “Disengage suction cup” and lift the cassette holder away
from the front panel at the same time.
ID: 39478155
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette
1 2

3 4

5 6
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8-6 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT 8.2

ID: 39479179
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.7 Removing a cassette
1 2

3 4

5
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 39480203
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.8 Technical data
Height 52 cm
Width ≤73 cm
Weight 4.2 kg
Cassette sizes Standard cassettes from 18 cm x 24 cm (portrait) to 35 cm x 43
cm
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 39481227
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
8.2.9 Compatibility
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45

• BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
• COSMOS BS

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-7


8.3 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS

ID: 39482251
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.2.10 Labels

A Logo B Manufacturer
C Type number D CE

ID: 39491979
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:02:06
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:02:18
8.3 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS
ID: 39482251
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.3.1 Labels

A Logo B Manufacturer
C Type number D CE

ID: 39571083
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed by: dep03476


Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14 8.3.2 Normal use
This cassette holder is hung in front of the front panel of the wall Bucky
BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package). A grid is not necessary for pe-
diatric exposures.

8-8 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 8.3

ID: 39572107
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14 8.3.3 Prohibited use
You must not use this cassette holder
• with a front-mounted anti-scatter grid
• on devices other than those stated above.
ID: 39573131
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14 8.3.4 Legend
1 2 1
3

7
8

1 Arm for fitting into the rails


2 Chin rest
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

3 Top cassette carrier


4 Bottom cassette carrier
5 Lever for releasing the bottom cassette carrier
6 Holding rail; prevents lifting and falling out
7

8 Disengage suction cup

ID: 39574155
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14 8.3.5 Installation

Ensure that the cassette holder is configured to your BuckyDiagnost VS according


to the accompanying installation manual. When the cassette holder is in place
the BuckyDiagnost VS is no longer counterbalanced.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

CAUTION

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-9


8.3 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS

1 2

ID: 39587979
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14 8.3.6 Dismantling
Remove cassette, if necessary
1 2

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Fig. Press button “Disengage suction cup” and lift the cassette holder away
from the front panel at the same time.

8-10 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 8.3

ID: 39478155
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.3.7 Inserting and positioning a cassette
1 2

3 4

5 6
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-11


8.3 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS

ID: 39479179
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:01:45
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:01:45 8.3.8 Removing a cassette
1 2

3 4

ID: 39591051
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14 8.3.9 Technical data
Height 52 cm
Width ≤73 cm
Weight 4.2 kg
Cassette sizes Standard cassettes from 13 cm x 18 cm (portrait) to 35 cm x 43
cm
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 39592075
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:14
Changed by: dep03476
8.3.10 Compatibility
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:14

BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package)

8-12 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Long cassette holder 8.4

ID: 39601803
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 10:49:30
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 10:49:43
8.4 Long cassette holder
ID: 39652619
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.1 Normal use
This cassette holder is hung in front of the front panel of the wall Bucky
BuckyDiagnost VE/VT.
ID: 39653643
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.2 Prohibited use
You must not use this cassette holder
• on motorized stands, as there is a danger of it falling off if the unit
runs into an obstacle
• with a front-mounted anti-scatter grid
• on devices other than those stated above
• with the triple cassette from Fuji.
ID: 39654667
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.3 Legend
1 1
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

2 2

3 3

4 4

1 Top cassette stop


2 Arm for fitting into the rails
3
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

4 Bottom cassette stop

ID: 39655691
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.4 Installation

▪ Ensure that the cassette holder is configured to your BuckyDiagnost VE/VT


according to the accompanying installation manual.
▪ When the cassette holder is in place the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT is no longer
counterbalanced.
CAUTION

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-13


8.4 Long cassette holder

1 2

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8-14 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Long cassette holder 8.4

ID: 39656715
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.5 Dismantling
Remove cassette, if necessary
1 2
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Fig. Press button “Disengage suction cup” and lift the cassette holder away
from the front panel at the same time.
ID: 39657739
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.6 Inserting a cassette
1 2
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-15


8.4 Long cassette holder

ID: 39658763
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.7 Removing a cassette
1 2

ID: 39659787
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.8 Technical data
Height 86 cm
Width 63 cm … 74 cm
Weight 2.4 kg
Cassette sizes 20 cm x 96 cm*
(* = standard) 30 cm x 90 cm*
30 cm x 120 cm*
35 cm x 90 cm
335 cm x 107 cm
35 cm x 129 cm
Service life 300,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 39660811
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.9 Compatibility
BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8-16 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 8.5

ID: 39661835
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:40
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:02:40 8.4.10 Labels

A Logo B Manufacturer
C Type number D CE

ID: 39670539
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:02:52
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:03:20
8.5 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with
ACL4
ID: 39675659
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.1 Normal use
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

The Babix holder


• is only designed for use with the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT,
• is for attaching the Babix baby bucket for examining small children
and
• is only swiveled in front of the cover plate of the Bucky for the du-
ration of the examination.
ID: 39676683
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.2 Prohibited use
The Babix holder is not suitable for use as a stretch grip.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-17


8.5 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4

ID: 39703307
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.3 Legend

2 3

1 Holding arm
2 Column
3 Suspension

ID: 39704331
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.4 Operation

Remove the patient stretch grip (if it is in place) before you swivel the holding
arm.

CAUTION

▶ Swivel the holding arm in front of the cover plate of the Bucky.

▶ Put the child into a Babix baby bucket suitable for his/her size
and secure.
▶ Hang the Babix baby bucket with the child in it from the sus-
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

pension hook.

8-18 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 8.6

▶ Align the Babix baby bucket for the exposure.

▶ After the exposure remove the Babix baby bucket and take the
child out.
ID: 39705355
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.5 Technical data
Max. load 10 kg
Service life 10,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 39706379
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.6 Compatibility
• BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

• Babix baby buckets


ID: 39707403
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:35:56
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:35:56 8.5.7 Labels
2

1 Type number

2 Max. load
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

ID: 39713803
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:36:15
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:36:45
8.6 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS
ID: 39727499
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.1 Customer Service
• mounts the Babix holder at the desired height
• sets the Babix holder to the necessary length.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-19


8.6 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS

ID: 39728523
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.2 Normal use
The Babix holder
• is only designed for use with the BuckyDiagnost VS,
• is for attaching the Babix baby bucket for examining small children
and
• is only swiveled in front of the cover plate of the Bucky for the du-
ration of the examination.
ID: 39729547
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.3 Prohibited use
The Babix holder is not suitable for use as a stretch grip.
ID: 39730571
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.4 Legend

3
4

1 Babix holder
2 Holding arm
3 Stand
4 Suspension

ID: 39731595
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.5 Operation

Remove the patient stretch grip (if it is in place) before you swivel the holding
arm.

CAUTION
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8-20 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 8.6

▶ Attach the holder to the fixture.

▶ Lift holder and insert as far as the stop (1).


▶ Lower holder to the horizontal position (2).
The green indicators signal that the holder has been correctly
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

inserted.
▶ Put the child into a Babix baby bucket suitable for his/her size
and secure.
▶ Hang the Babix baby bucket with the child in it from the sus-
pension hook.
▶ After the exposure remove the Babix baby bucket and take the
child out.
ID: 39732619
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.6 Technical data
Max. load 10 kg
Service life 10,000 exposures or 10 years

ID: 39733643
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.7 Compatibility
• BuckyDiagnost VS
• Babix baby buckets
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Accessories 8-21


8.7 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF

ID: 39734667
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 11:43:36
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 11:43:36 8.6.8 Labels

A Logo B Manufacturer
C Type number D CE

ID: 39741835
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 12:18:54
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 12:19:08
8.7 BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF
ID: 39743755
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 12:19:39
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 12:19:39 8.7.1 Attaching the handswitch

ID: 39744779
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 12:19:39
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 12:19:39 8.7.2 Removing the handswitch

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

8-22 Accessories BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Table of contents

9 Appendix .......................................................... 9-3

9.1 Messages ............................................................................ 9-3


9.1.1 System messages ................................................. 9-3
9.1.2 Generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 error messages
............................................................................ 9-5
9.1.3 Single-phase generator Optimus 30 error messages
............................................................................ 9-5
9.1.4 Patient data printer Optimus PDO error messages
............................................................................ 9-7
9.2 EMC data .......................................................................... 9-8
9.2.1 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration ........... 9-8
9.3 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – the hierarchy of levels on the display
......................................................................................... 9-10
9.4 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – button symbols and their meaning
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

......................................................................................... 9-11
9.5 Screen film combinations ................................................ 9-12
9.6 Exposure table ................................................................. 9-13
9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user ............. 9-16
9.7.1 You want to adapt the program to your system
.......................................................................... 9-16
9.7.2 If you wish to configure the program to your
requirements ..................................................... 9-18
9.7.3 You want to test your system ............................ 9-24
9.7.4 How to install the equipment ........................... 9-25
9.8 Glossary ........................................................................... 9-27
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Table of contents 9-1


Table of contents

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

9-2 Table of contents BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


ID: 39747339
Created by: dep03476

9 Appendix
Created: 22.02.2006 13:53:42
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 13:54:06

ID: 39873419
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
9.1 Messages
ID: 39874443
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02 9.1.1 System messages
• Messages in conjunction with the telephone symbol are for Cus-
tomer Service only (except for operation with key-operated switch).
Please note down these messages for Customer Service.
• Messages relating to the BuckyDiagnost CS ceiling suspension unit
are transfered unchanged to the control grip display. On the floor
stand BuckyDiagnost FS the abbreviation “CS” means “column” or
“tube assembly”.

Component Message Remarks


General This aux. is not available Choose another auxiliary
Grid was not released Error in the Bucky grid, reinsert cassette, if
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

necessary call Customer Service


Insert cassette –
Insert cassette again –
The cassette is already exposed Insert unexposed cassette
SID too small Raise tube assembly
No Bucky servo Motorized drive of the image receptor carriage
has failed, call Customer Service
Insert cassette centric –
Tracking Servo active –
Wall stand tilted Set cassette tray to 0° or 90°
Tube not at 0° Set radiation beam axis vertically
Tube not at 90° Set radiation beam axis horizontally
SID too small Measure SID again, zoom, if necessary
CS at limit The tracking range of movement is smaller than
the manual range of movement; move column
out of the boundary area.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Servo stand by Move tube assembly into the capture range


Press button again to servo Select auxiliary again
Servo off Select auxiliary
No servo for this device –
Servo not ready please wait –
Servo active please wait –
Tracking image receptor Maybe collision with Bucky tray Image receptor carriage is obstructed in con-
tinued running, remove obstruction

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-3


9.1 Messages

Component Message Remarks


Bucky is moving please wait Wait until the end of the movement
Move CS over Bucky tray Move the tube assembly over the image recep-
tor
Grid exposure CS trans not centered Move tube assembly to the image center
Press test for reference run System is not ready for tracking image recep-
tor. Move tube assembly and image receptor to
center position
Invalid cassette Use a larger cassette size
Tomo defect and telephone symbol –
Check field size –
Key-operated switch Restricted use Manual operation, call Customer Service
Wall Bucky Cassette still in the table Remove (second) cassette from the table
Bucky unit not at fixed position Locate table top horizontally or vertically
Lock CS in long. direction Movement in the fixed mounted rails
Lock CS in trans. direction Movement in the ceiling susp. unit
No wall cassette Insert cassette
Move CS over WS Move tube assembly centrally over the hori-
zontal table top
Tomographic unit No exp. release from generator Release ready for exposure
Exposure aborted at the generator See Instructions for Use for the generator
Press test for reference run Demonstrate the tomographic movement to
the patient
Center floor stand in long. direction Movement in the fixed mounted rails
Center floor stand in trans. direction Movement in the ceiling susp. unit
Move tube ass. into SID Movement in the telescopic tube
Raise tube assembly Movement in the telescopic tube
Lower tube assembly Movement in the telescopic tube
Set tube assembly to 0° Movement around the horizontal axis
Lock CS arm hor. rotation Turn the tube assembly round the stand so that
its longitudinal axis points in the same direction
as the longitudinal direction of the table
Raise table top –
Lower table top –
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Gen. preparation signalled –


CS long is still unlocked Engage the floor stand in the longitudinal di-
rection
Preparation tomo, please wait Lock CS in long. direction
Tomo active in the other room –
Aux. unit changed at the generator Wait until tomography is released
During tomography the auxiliary has been
changed at the generator control desk; repeat
exposure

9-4 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Messages 9.1

Component Message Remarks


Table top brakes released During tomography the table top has been
moved; repeat exposure
Movement aborted at the generator –
Bucky drive is defect Call Customer Service
Bucky table Cassette still in the wall stand Remove (second) cassette from the vertical
Bucky
Automatic Bucky Insert grid APR program with grid selected
Remove grid APR program without grid selected
False APR set APR record does not match Bucky, call Cus-
tomer Service
Combination tube assembly with AUX 5…8 Select aux. unit at the generator Control grip operates AUXs 1 … 4
Manual operation with automatic cassette Measure SID man. Use tape measure
size sensing
Automatic cassette size sensing/NICOL SID too small The film size used is not illuminated
Enlarge long. field size Pair of collimators longitudinally closed
Enlarge lat. field size Pair of collimators laterally closed
Limit coll-light use Allow the light field indicator to cool down
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

ID: 39875467
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02 9.1.2 Generator Optimus 30/50/65/80 error messages
Text Meaning Action
Door open The door to the examination room is not closed. Close door
XXXX Press RESET This message appears if, for example, there are mains Clear message: press “Reset” button. The generator is
voltage fluctuations. The error code XXXX is intended ready for operation.
for Customer Service.
03HJ Press RESET The focal spot selected has failed. You can proceed us- Press “Reset” button.
ing a different focal spot.
Press power on Initialization phase has been disrupted. Press power on again.
15LH During startup the footswitch has been pressed. Do not press the footswitch during startup.

ID: 39876491
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02 9.1.3 Single-phase generator Optimus 30 error messages
ID: 45941387
Created by: dep03476
Created: 08.03.2006 14:50:35
Changed by: dep03476
9.1.3.1 Error codes
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Changed: 08.03.2006 14:50:35

Error messages appear either in the form of a code in the kV display or


as text in the bottom line of the APR display.
Text Meaning Action
--- --- System error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E01 Communication error Switch off generator, check connecting cable, switch on generator. If this
does not work: Call Customer Service
E03 X-ray tube is not configured Call Customer Service

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-5


9.1 Messages

Text Meaning Action


E04 You have pressed the handswitch during start-up Release button and switch generator off and on again
E06 You have pressed the handswitch during start-up Release button and switch generator off and on again
E08 You have selected an incompatible X-ray tube Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E09 X-ray tube error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E10 Calibration error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E11 Error in high voltage unit Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E12 Exposure current is off limit Reduce exposure current
E13 Exposure voltage is off limit Reduce exposure voltage
E14 Exposure error Press "Reset" button or switch generator off and on again. If this does not
work: Call Customer Service
E15 Heating current error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E16 Communication error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E17 Power supply error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E18 Tube control error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E19 Error in high voltage unit Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
>E20 Service
E21 Tube assembly error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E23 Data communication error Switch generator off and on again. If this does not work: Call Customer
Service
E24 Auxiliary error Check auxiliary

ID: 39877515
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02 9.1.3.2 Error codes for generators without APR
Text Meaning Action
E09 Generator is overloaded. Wait a few minutes before taking the next exposure
E18 Anode accelerator error Call Customer Service
E34 System error Call Customer Service
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

E35 Door of examination room is not closed Close door


E36 Thermostat open Wait a few minutes before taking the next exposure
E37 X-ray tube is overloaded Let the tube assembly cool down for a few minutes

9-6 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Messages 9.1

ID: 39878539
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02 9.1.3.3 Operating instructions for generators with APR
Text Meaning Action
DOOR Door of examination room is not closed Close door
G.OVL Generator is overloaded Wait a few minutes before taking the next exposure
T.OVL X-ray tube is overloaded Let the tube assembly cool down for a few minutes
ROTOR Anode accelerator error Call Customer Service
HEAT Thermostat open Wait a few minutes before taking the next exposure
TECH System error Call Customer Service

ID: 39879563
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:02
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:02 9.1.4 Patient data printer Optimus PDO error messages
Text (examples) When? Cause and meaning … and what you can do
Device Error After the program start The serial port “COM1” Correct the settings and re-
Open: COM1: could not be opened. Assign- start the program.
ment of serial port in menu
“Configuration/options” is in-
correct.
OPTIMUS message: While the program is run- The program has received an 1. Press OK
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

FFFFF014 45kV 10mAs 1.23cGycm2 ning erroneous message from the 2. Exit programn
nose laterally 998813cm18cm115cm Er- generator or cannot assign 3. Test system
ror: Room: 4 the message. The PDO does not trans-
The error message is made up fer any erroneous equip-
of three parts: ment data.
1. The source of the errone-
ous message; here OPTI-
MUS message.
2. The content of the mes-
sage.
3. The type of error; here in-
correct room number.
The program checks the mes-
sage received from Optimus
and DIAMENTOR for
• identification (transmis-
sion error),
• sequence of arrival (se-
quence error),
• check sum (check sum er-
ror),
• room number (room er-
ror).
There are several possible
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

causes:
• The units are not switched
on.
• The cable connections are
faulty.
• The serial port is incor-
rectly configured.
• The computer is over-
loaded.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-7


9.2 EMC data

ID: 17458699
Created by: dep03476
Created: 05.09.2005 17:45:48
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 05.09.2005 17:45:48
9.2 EMC data
ID: 17868299
Created by: dep03476
Created: 06.09.2005 15:32:07
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 06.09.2005 15:32:07 9.2.1 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration
Electromagnetic emissions
This X-ray equipment is intended for use in the electromagnetic envi-
ronment specified below. The customer or the user of the X-ray equip-
ment should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environ-
ment – guidance
RF emissions Group 1 This system uses RF energy
CISPR 11 only for its internal function.
Therefore, its RF emissions
are very low and are not likely
to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The system is suitable for use
CISPR 11 in all establishments other
than domestic and those di-
rectly connected to the pub-
lic low-voltage power supply
network that supplies build-
ings used for domestic pur-
poses.
Harmonic emissions Complies
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/ flicker Complies
emissions IEC 61000-3-3

Althought it has been demonstrated that the performance and safety of


the X-ray equipment are not adversely affected, electromagnetic incom-
patibility may occur when connected to a standard domestic power
supply network. In such case it may be necessary for the user to take
suitable measures.
Electromagnetic immunity
This X-ray equipment is intended for use in the electromagnetic envi-
ronment specified below. The customer or the user of the X-ray equip-
ment should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environ-
ment – guidance
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete


IEC 61000-4-2 or ceramic tile. If floors are cov-
ered with synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast transient/ burst ±2 kV for power supply lines ±2 kV Mains power quality should be
IEC 61000-4-4 that of a typical commercial or
±1 kV for input/ output lines ±1 kV hospital environment.

9-8 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


EMC data 9.2

Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environ-
ment – guidance
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV Mains power quality should be
that of a typical commercial or
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV hospital environment.
Voltage disp. short interruptions and <5% UT1 (>95% dip in UT) for 0.5 Mains power quality should be
voltage variations on power supply in- cycle that of a typical commercial or
put lines IEC 61000-4-11 hospital environment. If the user
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles ±40% UT for 100 ms of the system requires continued
operation during power mains
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 25 cy- 70% UT for 500 ms interruptions, it is recommended
cles that the system be powered
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for 5 s 0% UT for 5 s from an uninterruptable power
supply or battery.
Power frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz) mag- 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
netic field IEC 61000-4-8 should be at levels characteristic
of a typical location in a typical
commercial or hospital environ-
ment.
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 150 kHz … 80 MHz 3V Portable and mobile RF commu-
nications equipment should be
3 V/m 80 MHz … 2.5 GHz 3 V/m used no closer to any part of the
system, including cables, than the
recommended seperation dis-
tance. This minimal distance is
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

calculated from the equation ap-


plicable to the frequency of the
transmitter:
Recommended seperation dis-
tance
Radiated RF IEC 61000-4-3 d = (3,5/3)P1/2
d = (3,5/3)P1/2 for 80 MHz … 800
MHz
d = (7/3)P1/2 for 800 MHz … 200
GHz
where P is the max. output pow-
er rating of the transmitter in
watts [W] according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d
is the recommended seperation
distance in meters [m].
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as dertermined by
an electromagnetic site survey2,
should be less than the compli-
ance level in each frequency
range3.
Interference may occur in the vi-
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

cinity of equipment marked with


the following symbol:

1
UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
2
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio
(cellular/ cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio,
AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-9


9.3 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – the hierarchy of levels on the display

theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment


due to fixed RF transmitters, an elecromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the
system should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal per-
formance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as
reorienting or relocating the system.
3
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 800 MHz field strenghts should
be less than 3 V/m.
Recommended separation distances
(between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and this
X-ray equipment)
This X-ray equipment is intended for use in an electromagnetic envi-
ronment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The user or
operator of the X-ray equipment can help to prevent electromagnetic
interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and this X-ray
equipment. The table below shows these minimum distance according
to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum output power of transmitter [W] Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter [m]
150 kHz … 80 MHz 80 MHz … 800 MHz 800 MHz … 2.5 GHz
d = (3.5/3)P1/2 d = (3.5/3)P1/2 d = (7/3)P1/2
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.17 1.17 2.33
10 3.67 3.67 7.38
100 11.66 11.66 23.33

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the
recommended separation distance d in meters [m] can be estimated
using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts [W]
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
• At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher
frequency range applies.
• These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures,
objects and people.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

ID: 39885451
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 14:51:39
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 14:51:46
9.3 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – the hierarchy of levels on
the display
There is more information than the display can give at a single level.
The information which is not visible is filed in three further levels.
Each time you press the button you call up the next level. After level 4,
level 1 reappears. If, after an error message, you have switched the gen-

9-10 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus 30/50/65/80 – button symbols and their meaning 9.4

erator off and back on again, you can call up this error message on level
4.
The following table tells you where you can find what information:
Exposure techniques Field* Display on level 1 Display on level 2 Display on level 3 Display on level 4
With AEC 1 kV kV 1 Message
2 Density correction mAs or mA (post-exposure Message
display)
3 Screen-film combination s (post-exposure display) Message
kV-mAs 1 kV kV 1 Message
2 mAs mA (calculated) Message
3 s 2 Message
kV-mAs-s 1 kV kV 1 Message
2 mAs mA (calculated) Message
3 s 2 Message
kV-mA-s 1 kV kV 1 Message
2 mA mAs (calculated) Message
3 s 2 Message
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

TDC 1 kV kV 1 Message
2 Density correction mAs or mA (post-exposure Message
display)
3 Screen-film combination s (programmed) Message

1
Total area of dose products (optional) in cGycm2 per examination
room and patient.
2
The recommended screen-film combination is displayed. You cannot
change the value. Apart from the precalculated value you can set all the
values on the control desk.
ID: 39888267
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 15:02:57
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 15:03:04
9.4 Optimus 30/50/65/80 – button symbols and their
meaning
The symbols on the buttons can be exchanged by Customer Service if
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

required.
Horizontal radiographic device

Tiltable examination device with overtable cassette

Angiography and Puck

Tiltable examination device with undertable tube assembly and cassette

Tomography unit

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-11


9.5 Screen film combinations

Fluoroscopy table with undertable tube assembly and image intensifier

Tiltable examination device with undertable tube assembly and image in-
tensifier
Spot-film device

Spot-film device, tomography

DSI

DSI, tomography

Show vessels

Fluoroscopy

Bolus chase in lower extremities

Skull unit

Kymography

2
Free cassette, room 2

2
Wall Bucky, room 2

ID: 39891083
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 15:05:37
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 15:05:44
9.5 Screen film combinations
Philips suggests the following designations:
• G200ST
• U400SP
• B100HR
• G200+–

Meaning of the abbreviations:


• G: Green
• U: Ultraviolet
• B: Blue
• ST: Standard
• SP: Special
• HR: High resolution
• +–: Graduated intensifying screen
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

• 100 … 400: Absolute screen speed

If required the Customer Service can program different names (6 char-


acters max.).

9-12 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Exposure table 9.6

ID: 39893515
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 15:08:37
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 15:09:00
9.6 Exposure table
Part of body Cassette size cm kV mAs Meas. cham. SID [cm] Focus SC [DIN] Grid 1

Skull and trunk


Zygo. arch., Henkeltopf 18 x 24 20 73 8 110 200 +

Skul ap/pa 24 x 30 20 77 16 110 400 +

Skull lateral 24 x 30 16 73 8 110 400 +

Clementschisch/Towne 24 x 30 (18 x 24 land- 26 81 25 110 400 +


scape)
Schüller/Stenvers 13 x 18 24 77 25 110 400 +

Rheese/Orbita 13 x 18 19 73 16 110 400 +

Pyramis comparison 13 x 18 22 77 16 110 400 +

Skull axial 24 x 30 28 85 32 110 400 +

Paranasal sinuses semiaxial 18 x 24 (13 x 18) 22 77 40 110 400

Nasal bone 13 x 18 3 44 2.5 110 200 +


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Cervical spine ap 18 x 24 10 66 25 110 400 +

Cervical spine lateral/obli- 18 x 24 12 73 25 150 400 +


que
Dorsal spine ap (- +) 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 21 77 25 110 400 +

Dorsal spine lateral (+ -)/(+ 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 32 81-85 40 110 400 +


- +)
Lumbar spine ap 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 22 77 25 110 400 +

Lumbar spine lateral (- +)/ 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 36 90-96 32 110 400 +


obl.
Saccrum lateral 18 x 24 (13 x 18) 28 90 40 110 400 +

Hip ap 24 x 30 20 77 20 110 400 +

Hip axial/Lauenstein 24 x 30 22 77 25 110 400 +

Ala-/obturatum exposure 24 x 30 24 77 25 110 400 +

Sacro iliac joint 18 x 24 22 81 20 110 400 +

Pelvis ap 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 20 77-85 12.5 110 400 +


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Thorax pa 35 x 35 (40 x 40) 18 125 2 180 400 +

Thorax lateral 35 x 35 (40 x 40) 26 125 3.2 180 200 +

Thorax recumbent (bed) 35 x 35 (40 x 40) 21 102 1 110 400

Ribs 1-7 30 x 40 (24 x 30) 16 66 20 110 400 +

Ribs 8-12 30 x 40 (24 x 30) 20 77 16 110 400 +

Abdomen

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-13


9.6 Exposure table

Part of body Cassette size cm kV mAs Meas. cham. SID [cm] Focus SC [DIN] Grid 1

Esophagus 24 x 30 90 400 +

Stomach 35 x 35 102 400 +

Stomach detail 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 117 400 +

Small intestine (Sellink) 35 x 35 (24 x 30) 109 400 +

Colon 35 x 35 117 150 400 +

Colon 109 400 +

Colon detail 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 125 400 +

Abdomen 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 85 400 +

Abdomen side pos. 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 90-102 400 +

Kidneys empty 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 77 400 +

Kidneys + contrast medi- 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 85 400 +


um
Kidneys detail 24 x 30 81 400 +

Ureter 20 x 40 (24 x 30) 77 400 +

Urethra 18 x 24 73 400 +

Bladder ap 18 x 24 77 400 +

Bladder lateral 18 x 24 90 400 +

Gallbladder empty 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 70 400 +

Gallbladder + contrast me- 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 77-85 400 +


dium
Gallbladder detail 18 x 24 73 400 +

Phlebographies
Pelvis 35 x 35 divid. into 3 77 400 +

Femur 35 x 35 divid. into 3 73 400 +

Tibia 35 x 35 divid. into 3 66 400 +

Upper extremities
Finger 13 x 18 1.5 46 2 110 200
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Thumb 13 x 18 3 46 3.2 110 200

Hand ap 18 x 24 3 46 3.2 110 200

Hand (zither player) 18 x 24 4 48 3.2 110 200

Wrist ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 5 48 4 110 200

Wrist lateral 18 x 24 divid. in 2 6 50 4 110 200

Navicular series ap/obl./lat. 24 x 30 or 18 x 24 divid. 6-7 50 3.2-5 110 200


in 4

9-14 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Exposure table 9.6

Part of body Cassette size cm kV mAs Meas. cham. SID [cm] Focus SC [DIN] Grid 1

Forearm + wrist ap 18 x 24 7 52 4 110 200

Forearm + wrist lateral 18 x 24 8 52 5 110 200

Forearm + elbow ap 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 8 55 4 110 200

Forearm + elbow lateral 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 9 55 5 110 200

Elbow ap 18 x 24 9 55 5 110 200

Elbow lateral 18 x 24 10 55 6.4 110 200

Humerus + elbow ap 24 x 30 divid. in 2 11 60 6.4 110 200

Humerus + elbow lateral 24 x 30 divid. in 2 12 60 6.4 110 200

Humerus + shoulder ap 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 13 66 10 110 200 +

Humerus + shoulder later- 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 13 66 12 110 200 +


al
Shoulder ap 18 x 24 16 66 32 110 200 +

Shoulder axial 18 x 24 16 66 32 110 200 +

Shoulder transthoracal 18 x 24 26 85/90 25 110 200 +

Clavicle 18 x 24 14 66 10 110 200 +


4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

Sternum lateral 24 x 30 42 85 8 110 200 +

Sternum oblique 24 x 30 21 77 16 110 200 +

Scapula ap 18 x 24 17 70 10 110 200 +

Lower extremities
Toes 18 x 24 (13 x 18) 2 46 2.5 110 200

Forefoot ap 18 x 24 3 48 2.5 110 200

Forefoot oblique 18 x 24 4 48 3.2 110 200

Foot ap 18 x 24 5 50 3.2 110 200

Foot oblique 18 x 24 6 50 5 110 200

Lower ankle ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 9 55 5 110 200

Lower ankle oblique 18 x 24 divid. in 2 7 52 4 110 200

Upper ankle ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 9 55 5 110 200

Upper ankle lateral 18 x 24 divid. in 2 8 55 4 110 200


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Calcaneum axial 18 x 24 divid. in 2 11 55 6.4 110 200

Calcaneum lateral 18 x 24 divid. in 2 8 52 4 110 200

Lower leg + upper ankle ap 20 x 40 9 57 4 110 200

Lower leg + upper ankle 20 x 40 8 57 3.2 110 200


lateral
Lower leg + knee ap 20 x 40 11 60 5 110 200

Lower leg + knee lateral 20 x 40 10 60 4 110 200

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-15


9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user

Part of body Cassette size cm kV mAs Meas. cham. SID [cm] Focus SC [DIN] Grid 1

Knee ap 18 x 24 11 66 5 110 200 +

Knee lateral 18 x 24 10 66 4 110 200 +

Patella axial + Défilé 13 x 18 12 63 8 110 200

Frik 13 x 18 or 18 x 24 special 13 63 10 110 200


cassette
Femur + knee ap/lateral 20 x 40 14 66 2 110 200 +

Femur + hip ap 20 x 40 16 73 20 110 400 +

Femur + hip lateral 20 x 40 16 73 25 110 400 +

Hip ap 24 x 30 20 77 20 110 400 +

Hip Sven Johansson 24 x 30 20 81 10 110 400

Hip axial/Lauenstein 24 x 30 22 77 25 110 400 +

Pelvis ap 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 20 77-85 12.5 110 400 +

1
If a grid is assigned to an APR program, “=” appears in this column.
ID: 39934347
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 15:30:16
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 15:30:26
9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user
ID: 39943819
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 15:56:29
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 15:56:29 9.7.1 You want to adapt the program to your system
This is possible with the help of the following submenus, which you can
access in the “File” menu:
▷ Input file

▶ Select drive, name and directory of the input file supplied by RIS.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

OK ▶ Accept entries
or
Cancel ▶ Do not accept entries

9-16 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user 9.7

▷ Output file

▶ Select drive, name and directory of the output file.


OK ▶ Accept entries
or
Cancel ▶ Do not accept entries

▷ If an output file does not yet exist, the following appears


File not found! Do you want to create this file?
Yes ▶ Create file

No ▶ Cancel
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

▷ Emptying the output file


This deletes the contents of the output file. At the same time, the
program backs up the current output file and creates a new one
as soon as new data are saved. The following appears
Storage of file ... on ... was successful!
OK ▶ Delete message.

▷ Printer 1/2
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Please note:
Only select the printer. The program permanently retains only
the printer from this dialog box. All other settings are temporary.
You must configure them permanently using the WINDOWS
control panel/Printers.
Depending on the printer speed and the quality of the printer
driver, the printing process can be a considerable strain on the
system and in isolated cases interfere with data transmission from
the Optimus or DIAMENTOR. Therefore configure the “Print-

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-17


9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user

er priority” of the Windows print manager in the menu “Options/


Print in background…” to “Low”.
▷ Font

▶ For the 1st (2nd) printer, select type, style and size of the font.
OK ▶ Accept selection
or
Cancel ▶ Do not accept selection.

▷ Exit
▶ Exit program.
ID: 39945611
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 15:56:47
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 15:56:50 9.7.2 If you wish to configure the program to your requirements
This is possible with the submenus, which you can access in the “Con-
figuration” menu item. Each submenu opens a window. As the layout
of all these windows is identical, this layout is explained using the ex-
ample below:

Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

1 Selection window
You will find the names of the fields you can edit on the left; the respective
entry on the right.
2 Dialog line
Your selection appears here. You can change the content of the input window.

9-18 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user 9.7

OK ▶ Accept changes
or
Cancel ▶ Cancel

You want to change the entry


▶ or select an entry using the mouse
The selected entry is highlighted.

▶ Change entry
▶ If necessary, select next entry and change etc.
OK ▶ Accept change
or

Can cel or
Esc
▶ Cancel

▶ Change between selection window and dialog line.

Main options
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

You can set the basic settings of the program. If you change the basic
settings, you must then exit and restart the program.
You can change the following parameters:
• Number of rooms in use
PDO can manage 3 examination rooms. Rooms not in use appear
gray and entries cannot be made for them.
• Number of patient fields
You can use up to 10 patient fields. Fields not in use appear gray and
entries cannot be made for them.
• Edit patient fields
Here you set whether “EDIT” is active and thus visible or not.
• Optimus
Select the port (COM1 … COM4) to which the generator control
desk is connected. If no control desk is connected: “NONE”
• DIAMENTOR M4
Select the port (COM1 … COM4) to which the DIAMENTOR is
connected. If no DIAMENTOR is connected: “NONE”
• DIAMENTOR room
Select the room in which the DIAMENTOR is connected.
• DIAMENTOR channel
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Select which channel of the DIAMENTOR the value for the area
dose is to be read off: A, B or A+B. With A+B the values of both
channels are totaled.
• Card reader
Select the port (COM1 … COM4) to which the chip card reader is
connected. If none is connected or if it is connected into the keyboard
port: “NONE/keyboard”.
• Standard input
Here you specify the stardard input device you call up with “NO”
or F4.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-19


9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user

You have the following to choose from


˗ “Input file”, if you want to transfer the patient data from the input
file,
˗ “Card reader”, if you want to record the patient data using a chip
or magnetic card reader,
˗ “Keyboard”, if you want to enter the patient data using the key-
board or scan them in using a barcode reader.
With “input file” and “card reader” “VIEW” appears in the data
mask as well.
• Output file name
It is normally defined in the “file/output file” menu. With the set-
tings “AUTO (monthly)” or “AUTO (daily)” the file name changes
automatically. This makes statistical evaluation easier.
• Program mode Normally, this function is switched off (NORMAL-
MODE). To find out how to test your program, see “You want to
test your system”.

Field names
You can define the names of the input/output fields in the data mask
and in the output. Please note that the screen can only display up to 14
characters of a name.
Input file fields
If you enter the patient data using an input file, you can define how the
individual fields are to be taken from the record and put into the patient
data fields. Input and output fields you are not using are automatically
hidden.
There are two possibilities:
• The fields of the record are separated by control characters.
˗ Select a separator for your input record, e.g. TAB.…
˗ Enter a number for each successive patient data field, which de-
fines which field position of the record is to appear in this patient
data field. In the data mask the content of the 3rd field of the
input record is assigned the patient data field “born”.
• The fields in this input file are to have a fixed position
˗ Select “NO SEPARATOR”
˗ Define from what position to what position individual characters
of the input record are transferred to the patient data field. To do
so, for each successive patient data field, enter two numbers sep-
arated by a comma.
In the following example the character positions 17 to 26 of the
record are assigned to the patient field “born”:
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

born 17,26

Card reader fields


If you enter the patient data using a chip card reader (see “Standard
input”), you can define how the individual fields are to be taken from
the record and put into the patient data fields. Proceed as described
under “Input file fields”.

9-20 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user 9.7

Output file fields


You can define the record layout of the output file. For this, you have
two “fixed” texts (“text constants”) and all patient and exposure data at
your disposal.
There are two possibilities:
• The fields of the record are separated by control characters
˗ Select a separator for your output record, e.g. TAB.
˗ Enter a number for each successive output data field, which de-
fines which field position of the record is to appear in this output
data field. In the data mask the content of the 3rd field of the
input record is assigned to the patient data field “born”.
In the following example the content of the "born" field is written
without a space before or after it in the 5th field position of the
output record:
born 5
• The fields in this output file are to have a fixed position
˗ Select “NO SEPARATOR”
˗ Define from what position to what position individual characters
of the record are transferred to the output data field. To do so,
for each successive patient data field, enter two numbers separated
by a comma.
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

In the following example the character positions 17 to 26 of the


record are assigned to the patient field “born”:
born 17,26
Undescribed characters of the record appear as a space. The length
of the record is defined by the highest character position in the
record description.

Text constants
You can add fixed text (max. 20 lines) to the record. At most, the text
may be as long as the width of the printed page.
▶ Select text line
▶ Enter text
OK ▶ Confirm entry
You can position your texts under “output file fields” and “edit
layout”.

Print layout
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Six different layouts are available under the menu “Edit layout”. If re-
quired you can edit these layouts.

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-21


9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user

Edit layout
You can define 6 layouts for output on the printer. After selecting 1
…… 6 the window “Edit layout (1 …… 6)” appears. Here you define
where on the printout patient and examination data fields and fixed
texts are to appear.
• Layout name
Give the current layout a name. It appears together with the con-
nected printer in the data mask in the “OUTPUT” panel.
• Layout units
Here you define the units of measurement for the layout:
˗ pica (1/10 inch)
Width of a character in 12-point pica script (1 character)
˗ lines (1/6 inch)
Height of a line in 12-point pica script (1 line)
˗ pt (1/72 inch)
Information in points
˗ inch
Information in inches
˗ cm
Information in cm.
You have to enter decimals with a decimal point.
Philips recommends:
that you use a typewriter font e.g. Courier for the printer output. All
characters have the same width, meaning you can position the output
fields in the units "lines" and "pica".
• Left margin
Width of the left margin.
• Upper margin
Width of the upper margin.
• Format width
You need this information if you want to repeat a layout format on
a page. Enter the width of a layout format in the units as under
“Horizontal units”. Under “Horizontal formats” and “Format ver-
tical” you define how often you want to repeat a format on a page.
• Format length
You need this information if you want to repeat a layout format on
a page. Enter the (vertical) length of a layout format in the units as
under “Vertical units”. Under “Horizontal formats” and “Format
vertical” you define how often you want to repeat a format on a page.
• Horizontal formats
You need this information if you want to repeat a layout format on
a page. Enter how often the adjacent layout formats are to appeat on
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

the print page.


• Format vertical
You need this information if you want to repeat a layout format on
a page. Enter how often the vertical layout formats are to appear on
the print page.
• Number of copies
You need this information if you want to have several copies per
exposure. Enter the relevant value.

9-22 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user 9.7

Layout control commands


After the format information for the layout the output file fields appear
(free texts and all patient and examination data fields) with positioning
information and other control commands. You can assign the following
layout control commands to these output file fields.
xy This position describes the top left corner of the output field in the lay-
out.
Example: 12 27
The top left corner of the output file field is shifted 12 units to the right and
27 units down in relation to the top left corner of the layout (defined under
“Upper margin” and “Left margin”).
V With the following positioning commands the content (value) of a field is
output (standard setting).
N With the following positioning commands the name of a field is output.
+ The counter index for the exposures of the examination is increased by
one. In addition the “V” command is run.
Cn Counting loop (count): The following commands are run n-times; at the
same time, the counter index for the exposures of the examination is in-
creased by 1. If there is no other information (feed), after every run a line
feed takes place (C40 is used e.g. with the list output per patient).
Ixy Feed (increment): After one run through the counting loop the format feed
is given in horizontal (x) and vertical (y) units. The standard setting is I01 (1
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

line feed).

Per output file field you can enter several layout control commands.
They are separated by commas.
Examples
Entry
Area dose 0 17, 30 17, 50 17

The content of the output file field is printed three times e.g. on three
identical labels side by side.
Display:
1.23cGycm2 23cGycm2 1.23cGycm2

Entry
Area dose N, 30 17, V, 50 17

At position 30 17 the name of the field appears (“Area dose”), at position


50 17 the content.
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Display
Area dose 1.23cGycm2

Entry
Area dose N, 10 17, V, 25 17, +, 40 17, +, 55 17

• At position 10 17 the name of the field appears (“Area dose”),


• at position 25 17 the value for the first exposure appears,

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-23


9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user

• at position 40 17 the value for the second exposure appears and


• at position 50 17 the value for the third exposure appears,

Display
Area dose 1.23cGycm2 2.68cGycm2 3.77cGycm2

Printer 1(2) options


Here you assign a layout to the printer and define when it is to print.
• Printer 1(2) using layout #
Enter the number of the layout the printer is to use to print.
• Printer output 1(2) with
“Exposure”: the data are printed after each exposure.
“Patient”: the data are printed after each patient change.

Output file options


If you have selected an output file under “Output file”, you can define
the time of output here:
• “Exposure”: output after each exposure
• “Patient”: output after each patient change
ID: 40178443
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 17:10:12
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 17:10:21 9.7.3 You want to test your system
Before the test ensure that when starting the program all devices are
connected and switched on.
Test program
After customization, you can test the program even without any real
data from the generator, e.g.
• the layout,
• the output times,
• assignment of the fields of the input file and the chip card reader,
• assignment of the fields of the output file.

For the test, the program always uses the file name “pdo test.txt” for the
output file to avoid confusion with real examination files.
Proceed as follows:
▶ Main options
▶ Program mode
▶ TESTMODE
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

▶ Exit program
▶ Start program; the following appears
Do you want to start the program in TESTMODE?
Yes ▶ Select test mode
In the data mask "Examination" now appears as a button.
If the file “optimus.mes” is in the PDO directory, you can artif-
ically generate generator data by pressing “EXAMINATION” or
F12 to test the program.

9-24 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user 9.7

After the test:


▶ NORMALMODE
▶ Exit program and restart.

Test chip card reader


Test the reading process in the TESTMODE.
Test barcode reader
The device is configured and coded on installation according to the
manufacturer’s directions. Test the reading process in the TEST-
MODE.
Test printer
Test the print-out in the TESTMODE.
Test connection to the OPTIMUS and to the DIAMENTOR…
▶ NORMALMODE
New ▶ Select this The following appears in the status line
OPTIMUS: … Reset OK
DIAMENTOR: … Reset OK
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

If the connection to the Optimus is faulty, no message appears.


▶ Rectify the fault and retest.
If the connection to the DIAMENTOR is faulty, the following
appears in the status line
OPTIMUS: … Reset OK
The following appears

▶ Rectify the fault and retest.

Test general operability


When you switch on the individual system components (generator, Di-
amentor, computer, PDO, printer) in any order, no error message may
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

(see chapter 9.1.3.2) appear.


ID: 40180875
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 17:22:24
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 17:22:31 9.7.4 How to install the equipment
Customer Service must enable PDO function on the generator.
Connections
Before you operate the PDO, you must connect it up. Proceed as fol-
lows:

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-25


9.7 Optimus PDO – Notes for the experienced user

▶ Switch off generator


▶ Switch off PC
▶ Connect up and screw on serial cable1 with 9-pin connector “C
300 X2” to the generator control desk and PC
▶ Connect green/yellow ground lead2 to the generator control desk
and PC
▶ Connect all other ports to the PC depending on system config-
uration and requirement.

1
You can extend the serial special cable with a standard cable (connect
all nine pins 1:1, shielded). The ground lead must be replaced by a longer
version of similar quality.
2
A suitable screw connection must be used on the PC on the metal
housing (preferably near the mains connection); paint should be re-
moved.
Serial ports
Generator, DIAMENTOR and card reader are connected to serial
ports. Configure these via “Windows control panel/Ports”. Select
“HARDWARE” for the protocol. The transfer parameters (Baud rate
etc.) are set by the PDO. Ensure that the settings for IRQ and base
address are correct.
If you want to install your PDO yourself, there are the two sample
configurations below.
Sample configuration (standard devices)
Serial ports:
COM1, IRQ4: Mouse
COM2, IRQ3: Optimus generator
Printer port:
LPT1, IRQ7: Label or list printer
Sample configuration for connecting all devices
To save system resources, you can also configure the printer ports under
Windows without Interrupt (IRQ). If this is not possible, you must put
the additional ports on free interrupts. You can find more about this in
the documentation on your port card.
Serial ports:
COM1, IRQ4: Mouse
COM2, IRQ3: OPTIMUS generator
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

COM3, IRQ5: DIAMENTOR M4


COM4, IRQ7: Card reader2
Printer ports:
LPT1, without IRQ: Label printer
LPT2, without IRQ: List printer
Devices that can be connected to the keyboard port (e.g. barcode reader,
magnetic card reader) do not require an additional connection. The data
are accepted by the program in the same way as an entry made on the
keyboard.

9-26 Appendix BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Glossary 9.8

ID: 40183307
Created by: dep03476
Created: 22.02.2006 17:27:51
Changed by: dep03476
Changed: 22.02.2006 17:27:56
9.8 Glossary
ACL4 Cassette tray with automatic cassette size sensing
AEC Automatic Exposure Control
APR Anatomical Programmed Radiography
APRF Anatomical Programmed Radiography and Fluoroscopy
AUX Auxiliary
II Image Intensifier
FL Fluoroscopy
DSI Digital Spot Imaging
SID Source-image distance
SFC Screen film combination
MCS Movable Cassette Stand
PDO Patient Data Organizer
PBL Positive Beam Limitation
SEV Photomultiplier adapter
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

TDC Tomography Density Control


Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Appendix 9-27


Index

Index
F
Focus 4-52
Footswitch 4-19
Free exposure 4-71
A
ACL4 3-23, 3-26
Added filter 4-10, 4-13 G
AEC 4-53, 4-59 Grid 4-44
APR 4-55, 4-59, 4-74 Groups 4-55, 4-59
APR exposure 4-74
APR program 4-17, 4-77
Automatic exposure control 4-64, 4-74 H
Auxiliary 4-16, 4-40, 4-52
Help text 3-8

B
I
Babix holder 3-41
Image receptor 3-9, 4-39
Brightness 4-51
Interchangeable grid 3-4
Bucky 3-4

C K
Key-operated switch 3-8, 4-42
Capture range 3-8
Cassette 4-32, 4-44
Cassette holder 4-43
Cassette size sensing 3-10, 4-8, 4-12 L
Cassette tray 3-23, 3-32 Lists 4-55, 4-59
Ceiling suspension unit 3-13, 3-28
Center position 3-10, 4-5, 4-7
Collimating 4-11, 4-15 M
Collimation 3-3 Measuring chamber 4-43
Collimator 3-13, 4-5, 4-10, 4-43, 4-47 Measuring field 4-54
Control grip 3-8, 3-13, 3-17 Mode display 3-9, 4-8
Control unit 3-32 Monitoring system 3-12

D O
Density 4-54 Oblique exposures 4-8
Display 3-44, 3-47
Dose display 4-67
P
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

Parking position 4-5


E Positive Beam Limitation 3-3
Exposure current 4-62 Post-exposure display 3-12
Exposure data 4-54
Exposure positions 3-4
Exposure techniques 3-11, 4-51, 4-53, 4-55, 4-59 R
Exposure time 4-64
Exposure unit 3-38 Ready for exposure 4-17
Remote control 3-32
Reset function 4-31

0-28 Index BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1


Index

S
Self-test 4-50
Servo assist 4-40
SID 4-10, 4-13
SID position 4-5
Stop 3-25
Stretch grip 3-40

T
Telescopic extension 3-16
Test run 4-41
Tomo trajectory 4-64
Tomographic time 4-64
Tomography 3-5, 3-9, 4-63
Tomography programs 7-36
Tracking 3-5, 3-9
Tube arm 3-16
Tube assembly 3-15, 3-28
4512 987 10081 AA/704 * 2006-04 en

V
Variofocus 3-12
Vertical Bucky 3-7, 4-8
Vertical carriage 3-16
Philips Medical Systems, August 2006

BuckyDiagnost Ver. 1 Index 0-29

You might also like